6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
-
Upload
nguyen-viet-anh -
Category
Documents
-
view
218 -
download
0
Transcript of 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
![Page 1: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 1/215
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY
GRE130
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2011
All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 1.1 )
![Page 2: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 2/215
1
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE130. Beforeinstalling and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbo ls used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed byimportant safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death orserious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or
serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result inminor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in property damage.
DANGER
WARNING
![Page 3: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 3/215
2
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generatedis dangerous.
Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit immediately after switching off the powersupply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dustdetailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
Ratings
Before applying AC voltage or the power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to theequipment ratings.
Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as thismay cause the equipment to malfunction.
External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check thesupply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
Power supply
If a power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records,event records and disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoringthe power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertaindata.
Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
Disposal
This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposingof this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. Ifany points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.
DANGER
![Page 4: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 4/215
3
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 6
2. Appl ication Notes 8
2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 8
2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection 8
2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection 12
2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 16
2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 19
2.2 Frequency Protection 22
2.2.1 Frequency element 22
2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element 22 2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output 27
3. Technical Description 29
3.1 Hardware Description 29
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 29
3.2 Input and Output Signals 31
3.2.1 AC Input Signals 31
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 31
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 34
3.3 Automatic Supervision 36
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 36
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 36
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 37
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 38
3.3.5 Failure Alarms 39
3.3.6 Trip Blocking 40
3.3.7 Setting 40
3.4 Recording Function 41
3.4.1 Fault Recording 41
3.4.2 Event Recording 41
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 42
3.5 Metering Function 44
4. User Interface 45
4.1 Outline of User Interface 45
4.1.1 Front Panel 45
4.1.2 Communication Ports 47
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 48
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 48
4.2.2 Relay Menu 51 4.2.3 Displaying Records 53
4.2.4 Status Display 60
![Page 5: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 5/215
4
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 64
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 66
4.2.7 Control 97
4.2.8 Testing 99
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 102
4.4 Modbus Interface 102
4.5 Clock Function 102
4.6 Special Mode 103
5. Installation 105
5.1 Receipt of Relays 105
5.2 Relay Mounting 105
5.2.1 Flush Mounting 105
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 107
5.4 Handling Precautions 107
5.5 External Connections 107
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 108
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 108
6.2 Cautions 108
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 108
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing 109
6.3 Preparations 110
6.4 Hardware Tests 111
6.4.1 User Interfaces 111
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits 111 6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits 112
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 113
6.5 Function Test 114
6.5.1 Measuring Element 114
6.5.2 Protection Scheme 119
6.5.3 Metering and Recording 120
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 120
6.6.1 On Load Test 120
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 120
6.7 Maintenance 122
6.7.1 Regular Testing 122
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 122
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 123
6.7.4 Resumption of Service 123
6.7.5 Storage 123
7. Putting Relay into Service 124
![Page 6: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 6/215
![Page 7: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 7/215
6
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Introduction
GRE130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distributionsubstations, generators, motors and transformers.
The GRE130 provides the following protection schemes.
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics
Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection
The GRE130 series provides the following protection schemes.
Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection
Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection
The GRE130 series provides the following functions.
Two settings groups
Configurable binary inputs and outputs
Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring
Control hierarchy change
Trip circuit supervision
Automatic self-supervision
Menu-based HMI system
Configurable LED indication
Metering and recording functions
Front mounted USB port for PC communications
Rear mounted RS485 serial port for communication
Rear mounted RJ45 port for Optional Connection
GRE130 provides continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits arealso monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad andmenu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via afront-mounted USB port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485 port. Thecommunication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access datagathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data communication withsubstation control and automation systems is supported according to the MODBUS RTU.
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE130 series and identifies the functions to be provided by each member.
![Page 8: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 8/215
7
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Funct ions
GRE130 -Model Number
410
[APPL] setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PP 3PN 3PV
O/V IDMT
O/V DT
U/V IDMT
U/V DT
ZPS IDMT *
ZPS DT *
NPS IDMT
NPS DT
FRQ
DFRQ
Trip circuit supervision
Self supervision
CB state monitoring
Trip counter alarm
Multiple settings groups
Metering
Fault records
Event records
Disturbance records MODBUS RTUcommunication
[APPL]setting; 1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage2PZ: two phase-to-phase voltage with zero phase voltage input3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage3PV: three phase-to-neutral voltage with zero phase voltage input
Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0 IDMT: inverse definite minimum time
DT: definite timeO/V: overvoltage protectionU/V: undervoltage protectionZPS: zero phase sequence overvoltage NPS: negative phase sequence overvoltageFRQ: Frequency protectionDFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection(): V0 calculated from three phase voltages
CAUTION: Do not change the APPL setting under service condition of the relay.
![Page 9: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 9/215
8
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2. Application Notes
2.1 Overvol tage and Undervoltage Protection
2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection
GRE130 provides three independent phase overvoltage elements with programmabledropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) ordefinite time (DT) operation. OV3 has definite time characteristic only.
Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.
Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements
The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined byequation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
( )
1a
k t G TMS c
V Vs
(1)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. Ifrequired, set the scheme switch [OVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. Thesecurves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
Table 2.1.1 Specifi cation of Inverse Time Curves
Curve Description k a c
“IDMT” 1 1 0
“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000
by 0.001 step
0.00 – 5.00
by 0.01 step
0.000 – 5.000
by 0.001 step
V0
Pickup
Dropoff
![Page 10: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 10/215
9
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Overvoltage Inverse Time
Curves
0.100
1.000
10.000
100.000
1000.000
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
O p e r a t i n g T i m e ( s e c s )
TMS = 1
TMS = 2
TMS = 5
TMS = 10
Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic
The OV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when theinverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then nointentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, theelement returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below thereset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timingfunction (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.5show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV3.
The OV1 protection allows the user to select either a definite time or an inverse time characteristicas shown in Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, andtrip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time
protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.
The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
![Page 11: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 11/215
10
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.
Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.5 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protectionOV3. The OV3 gives alarm signals OV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3.
The OV1 to OV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV3EN].
1()
OV1INST
2()
3()
1
1
1
OV1_TRIP1
0.00 - 300.00s
TOV1t 0
0
0
&
&
&
&
&
&1()
OV1 2()
3()
OV1-C_TRIP
OV1-A_TRIP
OV1-B_TRIP&
&
&
"DT"
"IDMT"
[OV1EN]
+
1
63
64
65
101
102
103
10451
52
53
1OV1_BLOCK15
Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection
1()OV2INST
2()
3()
1
1
1
OV2_TRIP1
0.00 - 300.00s
TOV2
t 0
0
0
&
&
&
&
&
&1()
OV2 2()
3()
OV2-C_TRIP
OV2-A_TRIP
OV2-B_TRIP&
&
&
"DT"
"IDMT"
[OV2EN]
+
1
66
67
68
108
109
110
11157
58
59
1OV2_BLOCK16
Figure 2.1.4 OV2 Overvoltage Protection
OV3_ ALARM 10.00 - 300.00s
TOV3
t 0
0
0
&
&
&1()
OV3 2()
3()
OV3-C_ ALARM
OV3-A_ALARM
OV3-B_ ALARM&
&
&
[OV3EN]
+
69
70
71
115
116
117
118
1OV3_BLOCK17
Figure 2.1.5 OV3 Overvoltage Protection
( )Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:
![Page 12: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 12/215
11
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
[APPL] settingPhase
1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP
1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase
2 - - B - C phase B phase B - C phase
3 - - - C phase C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their settingranges.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting
TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.
TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.
TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.
OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting
TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.
TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.
TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.
OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.
TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.
OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.
[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable
[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable
[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable
![Page 13: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 13/215
12
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection
GRE130 provides three independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 has definite timecharacteristic only.
Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.
V 0
Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements
The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2)following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
( )
1a
k t G TMS c
V Vs
(2)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = undervoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. Ifrequired, set the scheme switch [UVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. Thesecurves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
The UV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when theinverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then nointentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, theelement returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period withoutcausing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising
voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it hastravelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
![Page 14: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 14/215
13
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Undervoltage Inverse Time
Curves
1.000
10.000
100.000
1000.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Appl ied Vo ltage (x Vs)
O p e r a t i n g T i m e ( s e c s )
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.11 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV3.
The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown inFigure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signalUV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection isenabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.
The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shownin Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.
Figure 2.1.11 shows the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3. The UV3gives alarm signal UV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3.
The UV1 to UV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV3EN].
In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltagesdrop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV3 are prevented from operating. This function can be blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used)when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for loadshedding.
Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.
![Page 15: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 15/215
![Page 16: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 16/215
15
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
[APPL] settingPhase
1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP
1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase
2 - - B - C phase B phase B - C phase
3 - - - C phase C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their settingranges.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UV1 threshold setting
TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.
TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.
TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV1 threshold setting
TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.
TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.
TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV3 threshold setting.
TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV3 definite time setting.
VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.
[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/C
DT UV1 Enable
[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable
[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/
C
DT UV2 Enable
[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable
![Page 17: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 17/215
16
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZPS) is applied to earth fault detection onunearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.
The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZPS element susceptible to any 3rd harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3 rd harmonicfilter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.
For earth fault detection, the following two methods are in general use.
Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by a VT residual connection (broken-deltaconnection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.
Measuring the residual voltage across an earthing transformer as shown in Figure 2.114.
A B C
GRE130
V0
Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System
GRE130
A B
V0
G
Resistor
Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator
Two independent elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 are provided. These elements are programmable fordefinite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC60255-127:
![Page 18: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 18/215
17
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
c
V
V
k TMS Gt
S
1
)(
0
(3)
where:t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),
V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [ZPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
ZPS Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
0.010
0.100
1.000
10.000
100.000
1000.000
0 5 10 15 20
Appl ied Vo l tage (x Vs)
O p e r a t i n g
T i m e ( s e c s )
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZPS
![Page 19: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 19/215
18
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Definite time reset
A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation isidentical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 with independentthresholds output trip signals ZPS1 TRIP and ZPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TZOV1and TZPS2.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN].
ZPS1
ZPS1 TRIP10.00 - 300.00s
&
TZPS1
t 0
1
&
&
"DT"
"IDMT"
[ZPS1EN]
+
1
93
ZPS1INST
197134
ZPS1_BLOCK21
Figure 2.1.16 ZPS1 Overvoltage Protection
ZPS2
ZPS2_ALARM10.00 - 300.00s
&
TZPS2
t 0
1
&
&
"DT"
"IDMT"
[ZPS2EN]
+
1
94
ZPS2INST
198135
ZPS2_BLOCK22
Figure 2.1.17 ZPS2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.
Element Range Step Default RemarksZPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZPS1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping.
TZPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=IDMT.
TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS1 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=DT.
TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS1 definite time delayed reset.
ZPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZPS2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming.
TZPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=IDMT.
TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS2 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=DT.
TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS2 definite time delayed reset.
[ZPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZPS1 Enable
[ZPS2EN] Off / On Off ZPS2 Enable
![Page 20: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 20/215
19
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection (NPS) is used to detect voltage unbalanceconditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.
The NPS protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be
caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss canlead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.
The NPS protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, ifthe phase sequence is reversed.
Two independent elements NPS1 and NPS2 are provided. The elements are programmable fordefinite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC60255-127.
c
V
V
k TMS Gt
S
1
)(2
(4)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),
V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN]. Ifrequired, set the scheme switch [NPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
![Page 21: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 21/215
20
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
NPS Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
0.010
0.100
1.000
10.000
100.000
1000.000
0 5 10 15 2 0
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
O p e r a t i n g T i m e ( s e c s )
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NPS
Definite time reset
A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NPS1 element when the inverse time delay isused. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection.Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds outputtrip signals NPS1 TRIP and NPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.
The tripping can be disabled using scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN].
NPS1
NPS1 TRIP1
0.00 - 300.00s
&
TNPS1
t 0
1
&
&
"DT"
"IDMT"
[NPS1EN]
+
1
95
NPS1
INST
199136
NPS1_BLOCK23
Figure 2.1.19 NPS1 Overvoltage Protection
![Page 22: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 22/215
21
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
NPS2
NPS2_ALARM10.00 - 300.00s
&
TNPS2
t 0
1
&
&
"DT"
"IDMT"
[NPS2EN]
+
1
96
NPS2INST
200137
NPS2_BLOCK 24
Figure 2.1.20 NPS2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.
The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring
elements NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is approximately200ms.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
NPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.
TNPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=IDMT.
TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS1 definite time setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=DT.
TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS1 definite time delayed reset.
NPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.
TNPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=IDMT.
TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS2 definite time setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=DT.
TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS2 definite time delayed reset.
[NPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NPS1 Enable
[NPS2EN] Off / On Off NPS2 Enable
![Page 23: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 23/215
22
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.2 Frequency Protection
For a four-stage frequency protection, GRE130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuringelements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency,overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.
Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generationcapability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by loadshedding.
Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damagedue to overfrequency conditions.
Frequency rate-of-change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quicklywhen the frequency change is very rapid.
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.
2.2.1 Frequency element
Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the settingvalue.
Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the settingvalue.
These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutivetimes.
The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element(FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.
Figure 2.2.1 shows the characteristics of the UF and OF elements.
Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Elements
2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element
The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt).GRE130 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and afrequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a timeinterval (Δt=100ms), as shown Figure 2.2.2 and calculate the Δf/Δt every 5 ms. They operatewhen the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.
The output of both the D and R elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element(FRQBLK) operation during undervoltage condition.
Hz
0 FVBLK setting
V
UF setting
OF setting
UF
OF
![Page 24: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 24/215
23
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
Figure 2.2.2 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.2.3 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection for stage 1. The first frequency
element F11, the second F12, the frequency rise rate-of-change element DFR1 and frequencydecay rate-of-change element DFD1 can all output a trip command independently under thecondition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FVBLK.
FRQ1 TRIP
F12
F11 &
&
0.00 – 100.00St 0
0.00 – 100.00S
t 0&
FRQ1 BLOCK 1
Scheme Logic
Selection : [Logic1]
F1
F2
E
+ [FT1]
1
1U
UU
BOO
O
OFF
DF-D1
DF-R1& &
&
FVBLK
&
DFR
DFD
1
1
BOTH
D R
+[DFT1 ] OFF
211
&
212
213
214
235
42
231
232
233
234
Figure 2.2.3 FRQ1 Frequency Protection Logic
To apply the various types of frequency protection, the GRE130 has the following three schemeswitches for each stage. For stage 1,
[FT1]: This switch selects the frequency protection to apply as well as provide themeasuring elements F11 and F12 with an overfrequency or underfrequencycharacteristic.
![Page 25: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 25/215
24
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
F11 / F12 characteristi c Protection selected[FT1]setting F11 F12
O OF(*) - Overfrequency protection only with F11 element
U UF(**) - Underfrequency protection only with F11 element
B OF UF Overfrequency protection with F11 element and
underfrequency protection with F12 elementOO OF OF Overfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements
UU UF UF Underfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements
Off OF OF To block frequency protection
(*) OF: Overfrequency characteristic
(**)UF: Underfrequency characteristic
[DFT1]: This switch selects which frequency rate-of-change protection to apply. Thefollowing protections can be selected by the [DFT1] settings.
[DFT1] setting Protection selected
R Frequency rise rate-of-change protection only
D Frequency decay rate-of-change protection only
BOTH Both of frequency rise rate-of-change and decay rate-of-changeprotections
Off To block frequency rate-of-change protection
[LOGIC1]: This switch is provided in the scheme logic selection circuit in Table 2.2.1 anddetermines the trip command combination of frequency element output andfrequency rate-of-change element output. The following table shows the [Logic1]setting and corresponding combinations.
Table 2.2.1 Frequency protection logic
[Logic1]Setting
Scheme Logic Trip Command Logic ( +:OR, x : AND )
L1
E = F1 + F2 + DFR + DFD
L2
E = F1 x (DFR + DFD) + F2
L3
E = F1 + F2 x (DFR + DFD)
L4
E = (F1 + F2) x (DFR + DFD)
E
1
1
DFD
F1
F2
DFR
&
E
1
1
DFD
F1
F2
DFR
&
E1
DFD
F1
F2
DFR
&
&
1
1
DFD
EF1
F2
DFR
![Page 26: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 26/215
25
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
L5
E = F1 x DFR + F2 x DFD
The individual scheme logic for stages 2 to 4 are similar to that of stage 1 except that the devicenames of the measuring elements, timers, scheme switches and binary input signals change and thelogic described above is applied to stages 2 to 4.
FRQ2 TRIP
F22
F21 &
&
0.00 – 100.00St 0
0.00 – 100.00S
t 0&
FRQ2 BLOCK 1
Scheme Logic
Selection : [Logic2]
F1
F2
E
+ [FT2]
1
1U
UU
BOO
O
OFF
DF-D2
DF-R2& &
&
FVBLK
&
DFR
DFD
1
1
BOTH
D R
+[DFT2 ] OFF
215
&
216
217
218
240
43
236
237
238
239
Figure 2.2.4 FRQ2 Frequency Protection Logic
FRQ3 TRIP
F32
F31 &
&
0.00 – 100.00St 0
0.00 – 100.00S
t 0&
FRQ3 BLOCK 1
Scheme LogicSelection : [Logic3]
F1
F2
E
+ [FT3]1
1U
UU
B
OO
O
OFF
DF-D3
DF-R3& &
&
FVBLK
&
DFR
DFD
1
1
BOTH
D R
+[DFT3 ] OFF
219
&
220
221
222
245
44
241
242
243
244
Figure 2.2.5 FRQ3 Frequency Protection Logic
E1
DFD
F1
F2
DFR
&
&
![Page 27: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 27/215
26
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
FRQ4 TRIP
F42
F41 &
&
0.00 – 100.00St 0
0.00 – 100.00S
t 0&
FRQ4 BLOCK 1
Scheme Logic
Selection : [Logic4]
F1
F2
E
+ [FT4]
1
1U
UU
BOO
O
OFF
DF-D4
DF-R4& &
&
FVBLK
&
DFR
DFD
1
1
BOTH
D R
+[DFT4 ] OFF
223
&
224
225
226
250
45
246
247
248
249
Figure 2.2.6 FRQ4 Frequency Protection Logic
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown inthe table below.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
F1 (*) 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 51.00 Hz First frequency element setting
( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 61.00 Hz )F2 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 49.00 Hz Second frequency element setting
( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 59.00 Hz )
DF (**) 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s Frequency rate-of-change (**)
FVBLK(***) 40 –100 V 1 V 40 V Undervoltage block
TF1 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of first frequency element
TF2 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of second frequency element
FT Off / O / U / B / OO / UU B Frequency protection selection
DFT Off / R / D / Both Both Frequency rate-of-change protection selection
Logic L1 / L2 / L3 / L4 / L5 L1 Scheme logic selection
(*): Number 1 to 4 enter into for stages 1 to 4 respectively.
(**): DF is a common setting element name for DFR and DFD.(***): FVBLK is common to stage 1 to 4.
![Page 28: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 28/215
27
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output
GRE130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase tripand alarm for each protection. Figure 2.4.1 shows the trip and alarm signals grouped for each protection.
GRE130 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.3.
After the trip signal has disappeared, following the clearance of the fault, the reset time of thetripping output relay can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or via a binary input. This resetting resets all of the output relays collectively.
For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open bymonitoring the status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relayresetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breakertripping coil current.
OV1 TRIP
OV2 TRIP
UV1 TRIP
UV2 TRIP
ZPS1 TRIP
NPS1 TRIP
FRQ1 TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP
FRQ3 TRIP
FRQ4 TRIP
EN_TRIP1
141
OV1-A TRIP
OV2-A TRIP
UV1-A TRIP
UV2-A TRIP
OV1-B TRIP
OV2-B TRIP
UV1-B TRIP
UV2-B TRIP
OV1-C T RIP
OV2-C T RIP
UV1-C TRIP
UV2-C TRIP
ZPS1_TRIP
GEN_TRIP-A372
G EN. TR IP -N375
1
GEN_TRIP-B373
1
3741 G EN _TR IP-C
Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs
![Page 29: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 29/215
28
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
OV3 ALARM
UV3 ALARM
ZPS2 ALARM
NPS2 ALARM
OV3-A ALARM
UV3-A ALARM
OV3-B ALARM
UV3-B ALARM
OV3-C ALARM
UV3-C ALARM
ZPS2 ALARM
GEN_ALARM1380
1 GEN_ALARM-A381
1 GEN_ALARM-B382
1 GEN_ALARM-C383
GEN_ALARM-N384
Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont ’d)
![Page 30: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 30/215
29
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRE130 is shown in Appendix E.
As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the human machine interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display(LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB type-B connector on the front panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording,status and setting data.
There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined asfollows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”
menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Yellow Lit when relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED Red/Green/
Yellow
Lit when CB is closed.
CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.
LOCAL Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled
REMOTE Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1) Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED2) Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED3) Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED4) Red/Green/Yellow User-configurable
(LED5) Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED6) Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmedfor OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latched operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can
be changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow) , the individual status of which can beviewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For theoperation, see Section 4.2.1.
![Page 31: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 31/215
30
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user,
either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by the output of an alarm
element such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..
The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .
The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit,the CB can be controlled using the ○ and | keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LEDis lit, the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. Whenneither of these LEDs are lit , the CB control function is disabled.
The ▼ key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) view on the LCD. The ▼ key will
scroll the screen through “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when
the LCD is in the Digest screen mode.The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.
The END key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in
the “MAIN MENU”.
The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to inputsettings or to change settings.
The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.
Figure 3.1.1 Front Panel
To a local PC
Liquid crystaldisplay
Light emittingdiodes (LED)
Operation keys
USB type B connector
Control keys
Light emittingdiodes (LED)
Motor status
![Page 32: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 32/215
31
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.2 Input and Output Signals
3.2.1 AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE130 model and their respective
input terminal numbers. Their terminal numbers depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
: Scheme switch [APPL] setting
Model
410Term. No.
of TB1
1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PN 3PV 3PP
1-2Phase-to-
phasevoltage
Phase-to-neutralvoltage
A-B phasevoltage
A-B phasevoltage
A phasevoltage
A phasevoltage
A-B phasevoltage
3-4 --- ---B-C phase
voltageB-C phase
voltageB phasevoltage
B phasevoltage
B-C phasevoltage
5-6 --- --- --- ---C phasevoltage
C phasevoltage
C-A phasevoltage
7-8 Ve Ve --- Ve --- Ve Ve
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
The GRE130 provides 2 (Model 410) or 6 (Model 411) programmable binary input circuits. Each
binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion,detection threshold voltage change and function selection.
Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change
The binary input circuit of the GRE130 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-upand drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal orinverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closedcontacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to“Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delaytimes can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.
The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting rangevaries depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc ratedmodel is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 andBI2, and to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detectionnominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.
The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In the case of 24V and 48Vsupplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configuredfor operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to“Enable”. For the case where TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3),then the binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rateddc supply voltage.
![Page 33: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 33/215
32
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage changesettings are as follow:
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SNS – BI6SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm
BITHR1 BI1-2 nominal voltage 48 / 110 / 220
(12 / 24 / 48 )
110
(24)
BITHR2 BI3-6 nominal voltage 110 / 220
(24 / 48)
110
(24)
TCSPEN TCS enable Off / On / Opt-On Off
BI1PUD – BI6PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
BI1DOD – BI6DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI2 or BI6 bysetting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on theLCD.
()(+)GRE130
[BI2SNS]
"Inv"
"Norm"
BI1DODBI1PUD
BI2DODBI2PUD
BI6DOD
0 t
BI6PUD
t 0
0 tt 0
0 tt 0
0V
1
[BI6SNS]
"Inv"
"Norm"
BI1
BI2
BI6
[BI1SNS]
"Inv"
"Norm"
1
BI1 command
1
BI2 command
1
BI6 command
[BITHR1]
"110V"
"220V"
"48V"
BI1
BI2
+
+
+
[BITHR2]
"110V"
"220V"+
+
BI3
BI6
Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
Function selection
The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For thesetting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
![Page 34: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 34/215
33
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic andthe LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.
BI1 COMMAND "ON"
[OV1BLK]
OV1 BLOCK
"ON"
Alarm4] Alarm 4
"ON"
[OV2BLK]OV2 BLOCK
"ON"
[OV3BLK]OV3 BLOCK
Figure 3.2.2 Function Scheme Logic
The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND asshown in Figure 3.2.2.
Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals
Functio ns Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Conditi on
Overvoltage protection1 block OV1 BLOCK / OV 1BLK Closed to block
Overvoltage protection2 block OV2 BLOCK / OV 2BLK Closed to block
Overvoltage protection3 block OV3 BLOCK / OV 3BLK Closed to block
Undervoltage protection1 block UV1 BLOCK / UV 1BLK Closed to block
Undervoltage protection2 block UV 2 BLOCK / UV 2BLK Closed to block
Undervoltage protection3 block UV 3 BLOCK / UV 3BLK Closed to block
Zero phase sequence OV1 block ZPS1 BLOCK / ZP1BLK Closed to block
Zero phase sequence OV2 block ZPS2 BLOCK / ZP2BLK Closed to block
Negative phase sequenceOV1 block NPS1 BLOCK / NP1BLK Closed to block
Negative phase sequenceOV2 block NPS2 BLOCK / NP2BLK Closed to block
Frequency protection1 block FRQ1 BLOCK / FRQ1BLK Closed to blockFrequency protection2 block FRQ2 BLOCK / FRQ2BLK Closed to block
Frequency protection3 block FRQ3 BLOCK / FRQ3BLK Closed to block
Frequency protection4 block FRQ4 BLOCK / FRQ4BLK Closed to block
Trip circuit supervision TC FAIL / TCFALM Trip supply
State transition for cold load protection, trip
supervision and CB monitoring
CB CONT OPN / CBOPN CB normally open contact
CB monitoring CB CONT CLS / CBCLS CB normally closed contact.
Indication remote reset REMOTE RESET / RMTRST Closed to reset TRIP LED indication
and latch of binary output relays
Synchronize clock SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK Synchronize clock
![Page 35: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 35/215
34
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Conditi on
Disturbance record store STORE RECORD / STORCD Closed to store the record
Alarm 1 Alarm 1 / Alarm1 Closed to display Alarm 1 text.
Alarm 2 Alarm 2 / Alarm2 Closed to display Alarm 2 text.
Alarm 3 Alarm 3 / Alarm3 Closed to display Alarm 3 text.
Alarm 4 Alarm 4 / Alarm4 Closed to display Alarm 4 text.
Remote Open Remote OPEN / RMTOPN CB normally open contact.
Remote Close Remote CLOSE / RMTCLS CB normally close contact.
Control Lock Control Lock / CNTLCK Closed to block
(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups.
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SGS – BI6SGS Setting group selection OFF / 1 / 2 OFF
Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message using up to 22 characters foreach alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then wheninputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. Alloutputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRE130 provides 5 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for the relayfail output and four programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO4.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. Thesetting is respective for each output relay.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix A can be assigned to output relays BO1 to BO4individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN /CLOSE for CB control. The CB close control switch | is linked to BO1 and the CB open control
switch ○ is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.
Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown inFigure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix Gshows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off“Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by thescheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can beset by TBO. When “Dw” is selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal doesnot continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues, the BO output is continuous for thetime duration of the input signal.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the power supply circuit is
![Page 36: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 36/215
35
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
detected.
Auxiliary relay
0.00 – 10.00s
"Dl"
"Lat"
S
R
F/F
&
Signal List
4 GATES
or
4 GATES1
&
Appendix A1
0 t
+&
Reset button
+
"Dw"RESET
&
TBO
RMTRSTBI1_COMMAND
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element Range Step Default Remarks
[RESET] Ins Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix A Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,delayed, dwell or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix A
![Page 37: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 37/215
36
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3 Automatic Supervision
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Although the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it
continuously monitors the power system in order to detect a fault which may occur at any time,and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, whichchecks the health of the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role. TheGRE130 implements an automatic supervision function, based on the following concepts:
The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
When a failure occurs, it is recorded as an Alarm record, the user should be easily able toidentify the location of the failure.
Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring
The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance moni toring
The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the healthof the AC input circuit is verified.
Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]= “3PN” setting
|Va + V b + Vc| / 3 6.35 (V)
Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]≠ “1PN” or “1PP” setting
|Va + a2V b + aVc| / 3 6.35 (V) where, a = Phase shift operator of 120, a2 = Phase shift
operator of 240
The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detectionof failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits.
The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in thevoltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connectedwith the incorrect phase sequence.
A/D accuracy checking
An analog reference voltage is applied to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)converter, and a check is made to ensure that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribedrange, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the relay software is provided, to check that therelay software is running normally.
Power supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level is monitored, and a check is made to ensure that the DC voltage iswithin a prescribed range.
![Page 38: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 38/215
37
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3.3 Trip Circui t Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, asdescribed below.
Trip Circuit Supervision using 1 binary input
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using a binary input. Figure 3.3.1shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact , a small current flows through the binaryinput, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open and closed conditions. Then the logic signal output of the binary input circuit TCFAIL is "1" under healthy conditions.
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit, then the binary input resets andTC FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV isoutput when the TC FAIL output is "0". If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LEDis lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD message.
Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and one BIis selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-N" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CBis closed.
GRE130 Circuit Breaker
BinaryInput
CB Aux.Contacts
CB Trip CoilTrip Output+ve
TripSupply
-ve TripSupply
Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervis ion by 1 binary input
TC FAIL 1
[TCSPEN]
&
&
+"ON"
"OPT-ON"
1CB status “closed”
(BI command)
TCSV
0.4s
t 0
TC FAIL
(BI command)
1
0.4s
0 t
Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic
Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact a small current flows in the photo-couplers,the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open
and breaker closed conditions.If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a TripCircuit Fail alarm.
![Page 39: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 39/215
38
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Monitoring is enabled by setting scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the twoBIs selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while theCB is closed. TCS using 2BIs should be applied using BI1 and BI2 for the BI inputs. For TCSusing 2BIs the BI nominal operating voltage ([BITHR1]) should be set to a value of approximatelyhalf that of the trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is 110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] can be
set at "48" (or "12").GRE130 Circuit Breaker
Binary Input
(BI1)
CB Aux.Contacts
CB Trip CoilTrip Output+veTripSupply
-ve TripSupply
Resistor
Binary Input(BI2)
Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs
3.3.4 Circui t Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of the circuit breaker (CB). Iftwo binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’,
then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. Under normal circumstances these inputsare in opposite states. Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state for a periodof five seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed inan LCD message and event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm andBIn respectively, and the functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON”respectively. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)
1
[CBSMEN]
&
+"ON"
=1CBSV
5.0s
t 0
CB CONT_CLS
CB CONT_OPN1271
Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Periodic maintenance of a CB is required in order to check the trip circuit, the operatingmechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or anumber of fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time formaintenance of a CB:
![Page 40: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 40/215
39
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The number of trip operations are counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CBoperating mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations
performed. An alarm is issued and informs the user of the time for maintenance when the countexceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks the CBoperating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is advised if the CB operation isslow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the
phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phaseexceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specifiedinterrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting thescheme switch [OPTAEN].
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3.5 Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LEDindication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items andalarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automaticallywhen a failure is detected or displayed by pressing ▼ key. The event record messages are shownon the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The settingis used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item LCDMessage
LED"IN SERVICE"
LED"ALARM"
LED"Relay fail"
Alarm record Message
AC input imbalancemonitoring
Err:V0,Err:V2 (1)
On/Off (2) On (4)V0 err, V2 err,
Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
A/D accuracy check
Memory monitoring(1) Off On (4) Relay fail
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----
Power supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A
Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A
CB condition monitoringTrip count alarm
ALM: TPCOUNT
On On Off TP COUNT ALM,Relay fail-A
(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.5). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure isshown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.
![Page 41: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 41/215
40
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3.6 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked for aslong as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
A/D accuracy check
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output, or if only analarm is output.
3.3.7 Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in thetable below.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
[SVCNT] ALM&BLK/ALM Off Automatic supervision and
AC input imbalance supervision
[TCSPEN] Off/On Off Trip circuit supervision
[CBSMEN] Off/On Off CB condition supervision
[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm
TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting
![Page 42: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 42/215
41
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.4 Record ing Function
The GRE130 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recordingDisturbance recording
Counters
These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is initiated by a tripping command from the GRE130 and the following items arerecorded for one fault:
Date and timeTrip modeOperating phasePower system quantitiesUser configurable initiation
Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence
This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms usingthe relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.
Operating phase
This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.
Power sys tem quantities
The following power system quantities are recorded both pre-fault and post-fault.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltages (Va, V b, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, V bc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form ofthe system residual voltage (Ve)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1, V2, V0)
- Frequency (f)
3.4.2 Event Recording
The events shown in Appendix B are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status
changes. For BI1 to BI6 commands, the user can select the items to be recorded and their statuschange mode to initiate recording as below.
![Page 43: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 43/215
42
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
One of the following four modes is selectable.
Modes Setting
Not to record the event. N
To record the event when the status changes to "operate". O
To record the event when the status changes to "reset". R
To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". B
For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"
Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs after 200 records have been stored,the oldest event record is overwritten. The LCD display only shows 100 records. All event records(200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to download all of the event records onto a PCrefer to the RSM100 instruction manual.
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is initiated when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operatesor a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is initiated when a startcommand is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers.
The records include a maximum of 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signalsand the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B can beassigned using the binary signal setting of a disturbance record.
Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording
Model Model 410
APPL sett ing 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP
Vph Vph Vab Vab Va Va Vab
Vbc Vbc Vb Vb Vbc
Vc Vc Vca Analog signals
Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can bedisplayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM softwareinstruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the combined duration for the pre-fault and post-fault recordingtimes is 5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. Theapproximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records storedis shown in Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Record ing time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s
50Hz 40 25 15 10 9 7 6
60Hz 40 20 10 9 7 6 5
![Page 44: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 44/215
43
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown inthe table below.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
Time 0.1-5.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s Post-fault recording time
OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection
UV 5.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection
ZPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection
NPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection
Starting disturbance recording using a tripping command or the starter element listed above isenabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation
[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation
[ZPS] OFF/ON ON Start by ZPS operation
[NPS] OFF/ON ON Start by NPS operation
![Page 45: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 45/215
44
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.5 Metering Function
The GRE130 relay measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages,residual voltage, symmetrical component voltages and frequency. The measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
The following quantities are measured and updated every second.- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, V b, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, V bc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
- Frequency (f)
- Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)
- Frequency rate-of-change (df / dt)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary sideas determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the VT ratio as well.
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7.In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averagedover a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average valuesare shown on the display screen.
The displayed quantities depend on [APPL] settings and relay model as shown in Table 3.5.1.Input voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for measurement.
Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
Table 3.5.1 Displayed Quantity
Model Model 410
APPL 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Vph
Vab
Vbc
Vcb
V1
V2
V0
f
f max
f min
df / dt
![Page 46: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 46/215
45
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring)via a USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using MODBUScommunication via an RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu treefor the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the userwith information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing ▼ key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER key will display the main-
menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display at the top
of the main-menu. If any display is left for approximately 5 minutes without operation, the
back-light will go off.
LED
There are 14 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Yellow Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED R /G / Y Lit when CB is closed.
CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.
Local Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled
Remote Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1) R / G / Y user-configurable
(LED2) R / G / Y user-configurable
(LED3) R / G / Y user-configurable
(LED4) R / G / Y user-configurable
(LED5) R / G / Y user-configurable
(LED6) R / G / Y user-configurable
![Page 47: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 47/215
46
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED illuminates when the relay operates and remains lit even after the trip command
releases . The TRIP LED can be extinguished by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is maintained.
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as toinput or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
▼ , , , : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enternumerical values and text strings.
CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.
ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.
RESET key
Pressing the RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.
Control keys
The control keys are used for CB control. When the LCD display cursor is not at the CB control position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control keys will not function.
○ : Used for CB open operation. When the CB is in the open position, the ○ keydoes not function.
② | : Used for CB close operation. When the CB is in the closed position, the | key does not function
③ L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.
CAUTION
The CB close control key | is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when the control function is enabled.
USB connector
The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.
![Page 48: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 48/215
47
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following three interfaces are provided as communication ports:
USB port
RS485 port
Optional Communication Unit port
USB port
This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer (PC) to this connector, setting operation and displayfunctions can be performed.
RS485 port
The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication to connect between relays and to constructa network communication system.
The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
TB2
TB1
RS485 Port
Figure 4.1.1 Location of RS485 Port
![Page 49: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 49/215
48
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2 Operation of the User Interface
The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with theLCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation
When the GRE130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the ▼ key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are the "Indication","Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latestfault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is somedata. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
Metering
V a n * * . * * V
V b n * * . * * V
V c n * * . * * V
V 0 * * . * * V
V 1 * * . * * V
V 2 * * . * * V
f * * . * * H z
f / t * * . * * H z / s
To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault) of the latest fault indication,
press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
![Page 50: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 50/215
49
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
Status of element,Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s e A B C : Faulted phases.
O V 1 : Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is litas well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping.
Press the ▼ to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.
Press the RESET key for more than 3s to reset the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable LEDs
(LED1 through LED6) are assigned to a latched signal if triggered by tripping.
To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.
Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
![Page 51: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 51/215
50
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Displays in automatic supervision operation
Auto-supervision
E r r : R O M , A / D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure when the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision"screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LEDlights.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM"
LED remains lit.After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn offautomatically.
If a failure is detected when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayedand the "ALARM" LED lights.
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET key is available. To return to the digest
"Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
Press the
END key to turn off the LCD.
Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * : A L M 1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (Forsetting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. Clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
![Page 52: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 52/215
51
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.2 Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy for the GRE130. The menu has some sub-menus,"Record", "Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy,see Appendix D.
Record Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
Status Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view) Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Set. (change) Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/PLED
Control
Frequency
Control Password(Ctrl)
Local / Remote
CB close/open
Test Password(test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Menu
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
![Page 53: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 53/215
52
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as tripcount can be accessed.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relaymeasuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or RSM), adjusts clock andLCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate forRSM, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputsand configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings for password, description, relay addressand baud rate for Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.
Control
The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote position, the CB control hierarchy change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the
CB close/open position, the CB control keys○
and|
are enabled. Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set test switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then
proceed to the relay menus.
M A I N M E N U
> R e c o r d
S t a t u s
S e t . ( v i e w )
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
C o n t r o l
T e s t
To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the ▼ key to
turn off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
![Page 54: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 54/215
53
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.The 8th line under some items is not displayed for all of the screens. " ",or " " or " " displayedon the far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on thewindow, use the ▼ and keys.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T r i p _
> T r i p 1
O f f / O n
B I 1
O f f / O n
O V 1
O f f / O n
U V 1
O f f / O n
Z P S 1
O f F / O n
N P S 1
O f f / O n
F R Q 1
O f f / O n
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
D press the END or CANCEL key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and thenmove to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records andcounts such as trip count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records
To display fault records, do the following:
Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/ 1 R e c o r d
![Page 55: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 55/215
54
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
> F a u l t
E v e n t
D i s t u r b a n c e
C o u n t e r
Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
/ 2 F a u l t
> V i e w r e c o r d
C l e a r
Select "View record" to display the dates and times of the fault records stored in the relay fromthe top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 F a u l t
> ♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 1 0
♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and ▼ keys and press
the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼ keys.
/ 4 F a u l t ♯ 1
P r e f a u l t v a l u e s
V a n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V b n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V a b * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V b c * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c a * * . * * k V
![Page 56: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 56/215
55
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
* * * . * °
V p h * * . * * k V
V 0 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 1 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 2 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
f * * . * * H z
f / t * * . * * H z / s
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input
to the relay
To clear all the fault records, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d s
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is notdisplayed.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records
To display event records, do the following:
Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/ 2 E v e n t
> V i e w r e c o r d
C l e a r
Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 E v e n t
![Page 57: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 57/215
56
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 1 0 0
O V 1 ・ A t r i P O n
2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 9 9
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O N2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 9 8
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 3
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 2
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 1
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
The time is displayed by pressing the key.
/ 3 E v e n t
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 0 0
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O N
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 1 1
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 2 0 0
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O N
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 1 1
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 0 0
O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n
Press the key to return the screen with date.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼ keys.
To clear all the event records, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
![Page 58: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 58/215
57
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C l e a r r e c o r d s
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records
Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays onlythe recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in thefollowing sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to the RSM100 manual.
Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/ 2 D i s t u r b a n c e
> V i e w r e c o r d
C l e a r
Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top innew-to-old sequence.
/ 3 D i s t u r b a n c e
♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼ keys.
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
![Page 59: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 59/215
58
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C l e a r r e c o r d s
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter
Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2 C o u n t e r
> V i e w c o u n t e r
C l e a r T r i p s
C l e a r T r i p s A (*)
C l e a r T r i p s B (*)
C l e a r T r i p s C (*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/ 3 C o u n t e r
T r i p s * * * * * *
T r i p s A * * * * * * (*)
T r i p s B * * * * * * (*)
T r i p s C * * * * * * (*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼ keys.
To clear each count, do the following:
Open the "Record" sub-menu.
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen. Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
![Page 60: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 60/215
59
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C l e a r T r i p s ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s A ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s B ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s C ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.
![Page 61: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 61/215
60
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.4 Status Display
From the sub-menu "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
The data is updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data
To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/ 1 S t a t u s
> M e t e r i n g
B i n a r y I / O
R e l a y e l e m e n t
T i m e s y n c .
C l o c k a d j u s t .
L C D c o n t r a s t
.
Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 4 M e t e r i n g
V a n * * . * * k V APPL = 3PP
* * * . * °
V b n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V a b * * . * * k V APPL = 3PN
* * * . * °
V b c * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c a * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V p h * * . * * k V APPL = 1PP
![Page 62: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 62/215
61
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
V 0 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 1 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 2 * * . * * k V* * * . * °
f * * . * * H z
f m a x * * . * * H z
f m i n * * . * * H z
f / t * * . * * H z / s
f / t x * * . * * H z / s
f / t n * * . * * H z / s
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input
to the relay
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]
The display format is shown below.
[ ]
Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 FAIL
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" atthe photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 410.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable.The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of theoutput relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.
![Page 63: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 63/215
62
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements
To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/ 2 R y e l e m e n t
A N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
A B O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B C O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C A O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
A N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
A B U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B C U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C A U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
V Z P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]
V N P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]
F R Q 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[ ]
AN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A phase OV elements
BN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B phase OV element
CN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C phase OV element
AB OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A to B phase OV elements
BC OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B to C phase OV element
CA OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C to A phase OV element
OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 OV elements
AN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A phase UV element
BN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B phase UV element
CN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C phase UV element
AB UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A to B phase UV element
BC UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B to C phase UV element
CA UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C to A phase UV element
ZPS1-2 ZPS1 ZPS2 Zero Phase Sequence element
NPS1-2 NPS1 NPS2 - - Negative Phase Sequence element
FRQ1-4 FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 Frequency element
![Page 64: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 64/215
63
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the elementis in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source
The internal clock of the GRE130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binaryinput signal clock or Modbus. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) orinactive (=Inact.) and with which clock the relay is synchronised , do the following:
Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c .
> B I : A C T .
M o d b u s : I n a c t .
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked sourceclock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more since the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment
To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2 2 6 / A u g / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 [ L ]
> M i n u t e
0 _
H o u r
0 _
D a y2 6 _
M o n t h
8 _
Y e a r
2 0 1 0 _
Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock isrunning locally. When [BI] or [M] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details on how to enter
a numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
![Page 65: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 65/215
64
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Cont rast
To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2 L C D C o n t r a s t
■ ■ ■ ■
Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by
pressing the key and thicker by pressing the key.
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication or optional communication.
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
![Page 66: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 66/215
65
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.5.1 Relay Version
To view the relay version, do the following.
Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )
> V e r s i o n
D e s c r i p t i o n
C o m m s
R e c o r d
S t a t u s
P r o t e c t i o n
B i n a r y I / P
B i n a r y O / P
L E D
C o n t r o l
Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.
/ 2 V e r s i o n
> R e l a y t y p e
S o f t w a r e .
Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE130-411A-10-10)
G R E 1 3 0 - 4 1 1 A - 1 0
- 1 0
Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
G S 3 E M 1 - 0 3 - A
![Page 67: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 67/215
66
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description","Comms","Record", "Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P" ,"LED" ,"Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)"sub-menu.
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Relay address and baud rate for communication function
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection settingBinary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group","scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist betweenthe settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessarysettings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it isrecommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "activegroup" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method
There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item
When the screen shown below is displayed, setting of the relay can be performed as follows.
The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and ▼
keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and▼
keys.
![Page 68: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 68/215
67
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e )
> P a s s w o r d
D e s c r i p t i o n
C o m m s
R e c o r d S t a t u s
P r o t e c t i o n
B i n a r y I / P
B i n a r y O / P
L E D
C o n t r o l
F r e q u e n c y
Move the cursor to a setting item.
Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text str ing
Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
> P l a n t n a m e
D e s c r i p t i o n
To select a character, use keys ▼ , , and to move the blinking cursor down, up, left
and right. "" and "" on the final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximumof 22 characters can be entered.
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f
g h i j K l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `
Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER key.
Move the blinking cursor to select a character.
Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
![Page 69: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 69/215
68
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:
Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character. Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the
beginning.
To enter numerical values
When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. Thecursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and ▼ keys.
If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and ▼ keys.
/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r
T i m e 1 _ s
> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s
T i m e 2 2 . 0 s
O V 1 2 0 . 0 V
U V 6 0 . 0 V
Z P S 2 0 . 0 V
N P S 2 0 . 0 V
Move the cursor to a setting line.
Press the or key to set a desired value. The value can be raised or lowered by pressing
the or key. ,
Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value. If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the line that is to be corrected by
pressing the and ▼ keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper
one.
To complete the setting
Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, although they are stored in memory. To validate the new settings,take the following steps.
![Page 70: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 70/215
69
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the"Set. (change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to commence operation using the new
settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen
will return to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries
that have been made so far and to return to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:
Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Select "Test" to set the password for the test.
Set the password in the same manner as that of "Setting" above.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
![Page 71: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 71/215
70
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
screens.
If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.
S e t . ( c h a n g e )P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in thesame way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is canceled. Set the passwordagain.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. The data will be attached to records.
Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
> P l a n t n a m e
D e s c r i p t i o n
To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen. To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
To enter the name for Alarm, select "Alarm" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `
![Page 72: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 72/215
71
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Enter the text string.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.
Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2 C o m m s
> A d d r .
S w i t c h
Select "Addr." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3 C o m m s
A d d r . _
> A d d r . 1
Enter the relay address number on RSM or Modbus and press the ENTER key.
CAUTION Do not overlap the relay address number.
Setting for MODBUS communication
Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baudrate), etc., of the Modbus and other communication.
/ 3 S w i t c h
R S 4 8 5 _
> R S 4 8 5 0
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2
Select the number and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording func tion
To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)"screen.
Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
![Page 73: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 73/215
72
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 2 R e c o r d
> E v e n t
D i s t u r b a n c e
C o u n t e r
Setting the event recording
Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/ 3 E v e n t
B I 1 c o m m . _ > B I 1 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 2 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 3 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 4 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 5 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 6 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and
press the ENTER key.
Setting the disturbance recording
Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/ 3 D i s t u r b a n c e
> T i m e / S t a r t e r
S c h e m e s w
B i n a r y s i g .
![Page 74: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 74/215
73
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.
/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r
T i m e 1 _ s
> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s
T i m e 2 2 . 0 s
O V 1 2 0 . 0 V
U V 6 0 . 0 V
Z P S 2 0 . 0 V
N P S 2 0 . 0 V
Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set each starter to either used or not used, do the following:
Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T r i p _
> T r i p 1
O f f / O n
B I 1
O f f / O n
O V 1
O f f / O n
U V 1
O f f / O n
Z P S 1
O f f / O n
N P S 1
O f f / O n
F R Q 1
O f f / O n
D F R Q 1
O f f / O n
Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.
To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .
S I G 1 _
> S I G 1 5 1
S I G 2 5 1
S I G 3 5 1
S I G 4 5 1
![Page 75: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 75/215
74
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
S I G 3 1 5 1
S I G 3 2 5 1
Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix A.
Setting the counter
Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 3 C o u n t e r
> S c h e m e s w
A l a r m s e t
To set each counter to either used or not used , do the following:
Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T C S P E N _
> T C S P E N 1
O f f / O n / O p t - O n
C B S M E N 1
O f f / O n
T C A E N 1
O f f / O n
Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.
To set the threshold setting, do the following:
Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4 A l a r m s e t
T C A L M _
> T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0
Enter the threshold settings.
![Page 76: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 76/215
75
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/ 2 S t a t u s
> M e t e r i n g
T i m e s y n c .
Setting the metering
Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
D i s p l a y _ > D i s p l a y 1
P r i / S e c
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.
Enter 0(=Pri.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).
Enter 1(=Sec.) to display the secondary side voltage.
Setting the time synchronisation
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus.This is selected by setting as follows.
Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3 T i m e s y n c .
T i m e s y n c . _
> T i m e s y n c . 1
O f f / B I / M o d b u s
Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=Modbus) to be synchronised with the Modbus.
Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in the "Status"
sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because the event recordswill rapidly become full . (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.
![Page 77: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 77/215
76
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRE130 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in theoperation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do thefollowing:
Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n
> C h a n g e a c t . g p .
C h a n g e s e t
C o p y g p .
Changing the active group
Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e g p . _
> A c t i v e g p . 1
Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings
Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For thedefault values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:
Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/ 3 A c t g p . = 1
> C o m m o n
G r o u p 1
G r o u p 2
![Page 78: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 78/215
77
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Changing the Common settings
Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the
ENTER key.
/ 4 C o m m o n A P P L _
> A P P L 1
1 P P / 1 P N / 2 P P / 2 P Z
3 P N / 3 P V / 3 P P
A O L E D
O f f / O n
<APPL>
Enter 0(=1PP), 1(=1PN), 3(=2PP), 4(=2PZ), 5(=3PN), 6(=3PV) or 7(=3PP) to set the voltage
input state and press the ENTER key.
AOLED
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED light when an alarm element is output.
Enter 1 (=On) to illuminate the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press theENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
![Page 79: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 79/215
78
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Changing the Group settings
Select the "Group" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER
key.
/ 4 G r o u p *
> P a r a m e t e r
T r i p
Setting the parameter
Enter the line name, the VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:
Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5 P a r a m e t e r
> L i n e n a m e
V T r a t i o
Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.
Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.
Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.
/ 6 V T r a t i o
P V T _
> P V T 1 0 0
R V T 1 0 0
Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function
To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5 T r i p
> S c h e m e s w
P r o t . e l e m e n t
![Page 80: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 80/215
79
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the scheme switch
Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
> A p p l i c a t i o n
O V p r o t .
U V p r o t .
Z P S p r o t .
N P S p r o t .
F R Q p r o t .
Setting the application
To set the application setting, do the following.
Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n
S V C N T _
> S V C N T 1
A L & B L K / A L M
SVCNT Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automaticsupervision and AC input imbalance supervision.
Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the
ENTER key.
Setting the OV protection
The settings for the OV protection are as follows:
Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7 O V p r o t .
O V 1 E N _
> O V 1 E N 1
O f f / D T / I M D T / C
O V 2 E N 1
O f f / D T / I M D T / C
O V 3 E N 1
O f f / O n
OV1EN, <OV2EN>
To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.
Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
![Page 81: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 81/215
80
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
OV3EN
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3, enter 0
(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the UV protection
The settings for the UV protection are as follows:
Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/ 7 U V p r o t .
U V 1 E N _
> U V 1 E N 1
O f f / D T / I M D T / C
U V 2 E N 1
O f f / D T / I M D T / C
U V 3 E N 1
O f f / O n
V B L K E N 1
O f f / O n
UV1EN
, <UV2EN>
To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.
Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
UV3EN
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3, enter 0
(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
![Page 82: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 82/215
81
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
VBLKEN
Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV
blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the ZPS Protection
The settings for the ZPS protection are as follows:
Select "ZPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.
/ 7 Z P S p r o t
Z P S 1 E N _
> Z P S 1 E N 1
O f f / D T / I D M T / C
Z P S 2 E N 1
O f f / D T / I D M T / C
ZPS1EN
, <ZPS2EN>
To set the ZPS1 and ZPS2 time delayed type, do the following.
Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the ZPS1 or ZPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the NPS protection
The settings for the NPS protection are as follows:
Select "NPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NPS" screen.
/ 7 N P S p r o t
N P S 1 E N _
> N P S 1 E N 1
O f f / D T / I D M T / C
N P S 2 E N 1
O f f / D T / I D M T / C
![Page 83: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 83/215
82
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
NPS1EN, <NPS2EN>
To set the NPS1 and NPS2 time delayed type, do the following.
Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the NPS1 or NPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the FRQ protection
The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:
Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7 F R Q p r o t
F T 1 _
> F T 1 1
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 1 1
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 1
L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
F T 2 0
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 2 0
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 2
L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
F T 3 0
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 3 0
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 3
L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
F T 4 0
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 4 0
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 4 L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
![Page 84: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 84/215
83
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
<FT1>,<FT2>,<FT3>,<FT4>
FT1, FT2, FT3 and FT4 select the frequency protection.
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (=Off) not to use the frequency protection.Enter 1 (=O) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used.
Enter 2 (=U) to use the F11 element for underfrequency protection. The F12 element is notused
Enter 3 (=B) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection and the F12 element forunderfrequency protection.
Enter 4 (=OO) to use the F11 and F12 elements for overfrequency protection.
Enter 5 (=UU) to use the F11 and F12 elements for underfrequency protection.
<DFT1>, <DFT2>, <DFT3>, <DFT4>
DFT1, DFT2, DFT3 and DFT4 select the frequency rate-of-change protection.
Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the frequency rise rate nor frequency decay rate protection.
Enter 1 (= R) to use only the frequency rise rate protection.
Enter 2 (= D) to use only the frequency decay rate protection.
Enter 3 (= Both) to use both the frequency rise rate and frequency decay rate protections.
<Logic 1>, <Logic 2>, <Logic3>, <Logic 4>
Logic 1, Logic 2, Logic 3 and Logic 4 select the tripping combination of the frequency protectionand the frequency rate-of-change protection.
Enter 0 (=L1) or 1 (=L2) or 2 (=L3) or 3 (=L4) or 4 (=L5) and press the ENTER key.
Refer to Table 2.2.1 for setting.
Setting the protection elements
To set the protection elements, do the following.
Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t
> O V p r o t .
U V p r o t .
Z P S p r o t
N P S p r o t
F R Q p r o t
![Page 85: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 85/215
84
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the OV elements
Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7 O V p r o t .
O V 1 _ V
> O V 1 1 0 . 0 V OV1 Threshold setting.
T O V 1 1 . 0 0 S OV1 Definite time delay.
T O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T O V 1 R 0 . 0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay.
O V 1 D P R 9 5 % OV1 DO/PU ratio
O V 2 1 0 . 0 V OV2 Threshold setting.
T O V 2 1 . 0 0 S OV2 Definite time delay.
T O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 OV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T O V 2 R 0 . 0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay.
O V 2 D P R 9 5 % OV2 DO/PU ratio
O V 3 1 0 . 0 V OV3 Threshold setting.
T O V 3 1 . 0 0 S OV3 Definite time delay.
O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
O V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 ditto
O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
O V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
O V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the UV elements
Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.
![Page 86: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 86/215
85
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 7 U V p r o t .
U V 1 _ V
> U V 1 5 . 0 V UV1 Threshold setting.
T U V 1 0 . 0 5 S UV1 Definite time delay.
T U V 1 M 0 . 0 5 UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T U V 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay.
U V 2 4 0 . 0 V UV2 Threshold setting.
T U V 2 0 . 0 5 S UV2 Definite time delay.
T U V 2 M 0 . 0 5 UV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T U V 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay.
U V 3 1 0 . 0 V UV3 Threshold setting.
T U V 3 1 . 0 0 S UV3 Definite time delay.
V B L K 1 0 . 0 V UV Blocking threshold
U V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
U V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
U V 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
U V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
U V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
U V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Enter the numerical value and press the
ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the ZPS elements
Select "ZPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.
/ 7 Z P S p r o t
Z P S 1 _ V
> Z P S 1 5 . 0 V ZPS1 Threshold setting.
T Z P S 1 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 1 Definite time delay.
T Z P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T Z P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 1 Definite time reset delay.
Z P S 2 4 0 . 0 V ZPS 2 Threshold setting.
T Z P S 2 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 2 Definite time delay.
![Page 87: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 87/215
86
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
T Z P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T Z P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 2 Definite time reset delay.
Z P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
Z P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
Z P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Z P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
Z P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
Z P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the NPS protection elements
Select "NPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NPS" screen.
/ 7 N P S p r o t
N P S 1 _ V
> N P S 1 5 . 0 V NPS1 Threshold setting.
T N P S 1 0 . 0 5 S NPS 1 Definite time delay.
T N P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T N P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 1 Definite time reset delay.
N P S 2 4 0 . 0 V NPS 2 Threshold setting.
T N P S 2 0 . 0 5 S NPS 2 Definite time delay.
T N P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T N P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 2 Definite time reset delay.
N P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
N P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
N P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
N P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
N P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
N P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
![Page 88: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 88/215
87
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the FRQ elements
Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7 F R Q p r o t
F 1 1 _ H z
> F 1 1 5 . 0 H z F11 for FRQ1 threshold setting.
T F 1 1 0 . 0 5 S F11 Definite time delay.
F 1 2 5 . 0 H z F12 for FRQ1 Threshold setting.
T F 1 2 0 . 0 5 S F12 Definite time delay.
D F 1 0 . 5 H z / s DF1 for FRQ1 of DFRQ1 Threshold setting.
F 2 1 5 . 0 H z F21 for FRQ2 threshold setting.
T F 2 1 0 . 0 5 S F21 Definite time delay.
F 2 2 5 . 0 H z F22 for FRQ2 Threshold setting.
T F 2 2 0 . 0 5 S F22 Definite time delay.
D F 2 0 . 5 H z / s DF2 for FRQ2 of DFRQ2 Threshold setting. F 3 1 5 . 0 H z F31 for FRQ3 threshold setting.
T F 3 1 0 . 0 5 S F31 Definite time delay.
F 3 2 5 . 0 H z F32 for FRQ3 Threshold setting.
T F 3 2 0 . 0 5 S F32 Definite time delay.
D F 3 0 . 5 H z / s DF3 for FRQ3 of DFRQ3 Threshold setting.
F 4 1 5 . 0 H z F41 for FRQ4 threshold setting.
T F 4 1 0 . 0 5 S F41 Definite time delay.
F 4 2 5 . 0 H z F42 for FRQ4 Threshold setting.
T F 4 2 0 . 0 5 S F42 Definite time delay.
D F 4 0 . 5 H z / s DF4 for FRQ4 of DFRQ4 Threshold setting.
Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
![Page 89: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 89/215
88
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting group copy
To copy the settings from one settings group and overwrite them to another group, do thefollowing:
Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3 C o p y A t o B
> A _
B _
Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the
ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input
The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / P
> B I S t a t u s
B I 1
B I 2
B I 3
B I 4
B I 5
B I 6
A l a r m 1 T e x t
A l a r m 2 T e x t
A l a r m 3 T e x t
A l a r m 4 T e x t
Setting Binary Input Status
The binary input nominal operating voltage can be selected in GRE130. Control voltages of 24V,48V, 110V and 220V are supported.
BI1 and BI2 can be set to one of three nominal voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)
BI3 to BI6 can be set to one of two nominal voltages – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)
Note: The nominal voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Supervision using 2
Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.
The threshold voltage options of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to the dc auxiliary voltage
![Page 90: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 90/215
89
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
supply rating of the relay models.To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:
Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.
/ 3 B I S t a t u s
B I T H R 1
> B I T H R 1 1
4 8 / 1 1 0 / 2 2 0
B I T H R 2 0
1 1 0 / 2 2 0
BITHR1
To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 1 and 2 , do the following.
Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
BITHR2
To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 3 to 6 , do the following.
Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
Selection of Binary Input
Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
/ 3 B I 1
> T i m e r s
F u n c t i o n s
Setting Alarm Text
If the BI selected is used for an alarm, an alarm message can be set.
Select the Alarm text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `
Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
![Page 91: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 91/215
90
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
Setting timers
Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4 T i m e r s
B I 1 P U D _ s
> B I 1 P U D 0 . 0 0 s Pick-up delay setting
B I 1 D O D 0 . 0 0 s Drop-off delay setting
Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
Setting Functions
Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n
B I 1 S N S _
> B I 1 S N S 0
N o r m / I n v
B I 1 S G S 0
O f f / 1 / 2
O V 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O V 2 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O V 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
U V 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
U V 2 B L K 0
O f f / O n
U V 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
Z P S B L K 0
O f f / O n
N P S B L K 0
O f f / O n
F R Q B L K 0
O f f / O n
![Page 92: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 92/215
91
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
BI1SNS
To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.
Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
BI1SGS
To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.
Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) and press the ENTER key.
Others
Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output
All the binary outputs of the GRE130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Availablesignals are listed in Appendix C.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix G shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
Note: Setting is required for all binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to
logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.
![Page 93: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 93/215
92
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/ 3 B O
> L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
Setting the logic gate type and timer
Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D I / D w / L a t
Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing
and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assign ing s ignals
Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 - - -
I n ♯ 2 - - - I n ♯ 3 - - -
I n ♯ 4 - - -
T B O 0 . 2 0 s
Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to eachsignal referring to Appendix A. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 173 (signal names:"BO1 OP" to "BO4 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
![Page 94: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 94/215
93
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
CAUTION
The CB close control key | is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,when the control function is enabled.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Six of the LEDs provided by the GRE130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate an OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status ofwhich can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix A can be assigned to each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
> L E D
V i r t u a l L E D
Selection of real LEDs
Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4 L E D
> L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
L E D C o l o r
![Page 95: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 95/215
94
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the logic gate type and reset type
Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assign ing s ignals
Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5 F u n c t i o n s
I n # 1 _
> I n # 1 - - -
I n # 2 - - -
I n # 3 - - -
I n # 4 - - -
Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to eachsignal referring to Appendix A.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
Setting the LED color
Select "LED color" on the "LED " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the"LED color" screen.
/ 5 L E D C o l o r
C o l o r _
> C o l o r 0
R / G / Y
![Page 96: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 96/215
95
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Select the LED color from red, green or yellow.
Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.
Selection of vi rtual LEDs Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D
> I N D 1
I N D 2
Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/ 4 I N D 1
> R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
Setting the reset timing
Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5 R e s e tR e s e t _
> R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assign ing s ignals
Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5 F n c t i o n s
B I T 1 _
> B I T 1 - - -
B I T 2 - - -
B I T 3 - - -
B I T 4 - - -
B I T 5 - - -
B I T 6 - - -
![Page 97: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 97/215
96
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
B I T 7 - - -
B I T 8 - - -
Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring toAppendix A.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.6.11 Control
The GRE130 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by using the front panel keys.
The interlock function can be used to block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command withinterlock signals from binary inputs or from a communication command.
To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:
Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/ 2 C o n t r o l
C o n t r o l _
> C o n t r o l 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
I n t e r l o c k 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function to be in use or not in use and
press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function to be in use or not in use and
press the ENTER key.
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are notlit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.6.12 Frequency
Setting of the system frequency for the GRE130 relay for 50Hz or 60Hz.
To change the system frequency, do the following:
Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.
/ 2 F r e q u e n c y
F r e q u e n c y _
> F r e q u e n c y 0
5 0 H z / 6 0 H z
Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the
![Page 98: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 98/215
97
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ENTER key.
CAUTION
When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE130 must reboot to enable thesetting change.
4.2.7 Control
The sub-menu "Control" enables the Circuit Breaker(CB) control function from the front panelkeys - ○ , | and L/R .
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are notlit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Contro l
The "Local/Remote" function provides for change of CB control hierarchy.
Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
> P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
L o c a l / R e m o t e
C B c l o s e / o p e n
Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on the LCD.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
> L o c a l / R e m o t e
C B c l o s e / o p e n
The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.
4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control
The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.
Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
L o c a l / R e m o t e
> C B c l o s e / o p e n
The | and ○ keys are enabled to control the CB – close / open.
![Page 99: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 99/215
98
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.7.3 Password
For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:
Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
C o n t r o l
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
C o n t r o l
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the control screens.
If "Control" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" isdisplayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Control"sub-menu screens.
C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in thesame way as the first password setting.
![Page 100: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 100/215
99
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
If you forget the password
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The password protection for the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.8 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function andforced operation of binary outputs.
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.
4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch
The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure of the items that are beingmonitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LEDand LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
Select "Test" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/ 1 T e s t
> P a s s w o r d ( T e s t )
S w i t c h
B i n a r y O / P
Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.
/ 2 S w i t h
A . M . F _
> A . M . F 1
O f f / O n
U V T S T 0
O f f / O n
Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the
ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay
It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections to external
![Page 101: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 101/215
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCDdisplays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 2 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 3 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 4 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
F A I L 0 D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to forcibly operate the output relays.
After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.8.3 Password
For the sake of security during testing, password protection can be set as follows:
Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen. Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
T e s t
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
![Page 102: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 102/215
101
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
T e s t
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting changescreens.
If "Test" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" isdisplayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Test"sub-menu screens.
T e s t
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in thesame way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen will go off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is cancelled. Set the passwordagain.
![Page 103: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 103/215
102
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.3 Personal Computer Interface
The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel.Using a personal computer, the following analysis and display of fault currents are available inaddition to the items available on the LCD screen.
Display of current waveform: Oscillograph display
Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
For details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 Modbus Interface
GRE130 supports the Modbus communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the
relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement andstatus data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix L.)
Measurement data: current
Status data: events, fault indications, counters, etc.
Setting data
Remote CB operation: Open / Close
Time setting / synchronization
The protocol can be used via the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. SeeSection 4.2.6.4.
4.5 Clock Function
The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
Event records
Disturbance records
Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal or Modbus. This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot expressyear-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number ofmilliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is inputevery second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. Whenthe trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie thenumber of seconds is incremented).
![Page 104: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 104/215
103
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in separate volume "PCINTERFACE RSM100" and "RSM" is selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendarclock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with anexternal time standard, then all the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
4.6 Special Mode
The GRE130 will enter the following special mode using a specific key operation.
LCD contrast adjustment mode
Light check mode
LCD contrast adjustment mode
When the LCD is not evident or not displayed clearly, it may be that the contrast adjustment forthe LCD may not be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any of the screens,do the following:
Press ▼ and ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to the LCD contrast adjustmentmode.
L C D C o n t r a s t
Press the or key to adjust the contrast.
Freeze mode
CAUTION This mode is relay function all freeze. Do not shift this mode.
Press with and CANCEL already pressed , to shift Freeze boot mode.
Then the LEDs of "In service", "TRIP", "ALARM", "Relay fail" and "LED1-6" are lit whilethe LCD screen and other programs are frozen.
When in this mode, protection functions are NOT available.
corrected to (n+1) sec
500ms
n sec (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
![Page 105: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 105/215
104
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
LCD and LED check mode
To exercise the LCD and LED check , do the following.
Press key for 3 seconds or more when the LCD is off.
While pressing key all LEDs are lit and white dots will appear on the whole LCD screen. The colors of the configurable LEDs (LED1-6) can be chosen in the user setting color.
Release key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode.
IN SERVICE
TRIP
ALARM
RELAY FAIL
CB CLOSED CB OPEN LOCAL REMOTE
User configurable
LEDs (LED1-6)
![Page 106: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 106/215
105
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out an acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check fordamage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting
The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.
Appendix E shows the case outlines.
1 4
513
5
127
117
Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit
The attachment kits can be mounted on a panel thickness of 1 – 2.5mm when the M4x8 screwsincluded with the kit are used. When mounted on a panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screwstogether with some spacing washers should be used.
5.2.1 Flush Mounting
For flush mounting in a panel cut-out;
・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of the panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.
・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.
・Tighten the M4 screws from the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.The allowed range for the fixing screw tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.
Do not tighten the screws too tightly.
![Page 107: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 107/215
106
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1 6 0
143 +0.2
-0.2
+ 0 . 2
- 0 . 2
Fig. 5.2.2 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out
Fig. 5.2.3 Side view of GRE130 showing the positions of the mounting attachment k it
![Page 108: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 108/215
107
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of GRE130 showing the screw location for the mounting attachment ki ts
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules arevery sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
5.4 Handling Precautions
A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuitscan cause serious damage. Often, this damage may not be immediately apparent, but the reliabilityof the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.Do not expose them to risk of damage.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed andmanufactured.
CAUTION Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself.
Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carriedout in a Special Handling Area.
5.5 External ConnectionsExternal connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.
![Page 109: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 109/215
108
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRE130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and theconjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully utilised.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuitsfunction when the DC power is supplied.
User interfacesBinary input circuits and output circuitsAC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recordingConjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other externalequipment.
The following tests are included:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity checkTripping circuit test
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
When connecting the cable to the rear of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attachthe cover provided for the terminal block .
Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
![Page 110: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 110/215
109
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing
CAUTION
When the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.
Before turning the power on, check the following:- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
Be careful to ensure that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
![Page 111: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 111/215
110
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase voltage source1 Three-phase voltage source1 power supply3 Phase angle meter3 AC ammeter3 AC voltmeter1 Time counter, precision timer1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, theinternal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’sspecification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage and frequency ratings, andauxiliary supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it to the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100software is required to run the PC.
For full details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
![Page 112: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 112/215
111
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.4 Hardware Tests
The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current andvoltage sources are required.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD ・LED display
Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is litgreen.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is applied.
Press key for 3 seconds or longer and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and
that all LEDs are lit.
Operation keys
Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press any keys to check that they operate.
6.4.2 Binary Input Circui ts
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
GRE130
-13TB2
-14
powersupply
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
-13
- 14
-12
TB1
- 19
-20
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circu it
![Page 113: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 113/215
112
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]
Apply the rated supply voltage to terminals 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal blockTB2.Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (Fordetails of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test from one terminal to another or for all the terminals atonce.
6.4.3 Binary Output Circui ts
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay driversand output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The outputcontact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displaysthe name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 2 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 3 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 4 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
F A I L 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed collectively.
![Page 114: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 114/215
113
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.
Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4 AC Input Circui ts
This test can be performed by applying check currents to the AC input circuits and verifying thatthe values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2.
V A
VB
C
TB1
powersupply
-13
-14
12
TB1
GRE130
-1
-2
-3
Three-phasevoltagesource
V
-4
-5
-6
Single-phasevoltagesource
-7
-8
V
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the following.
"Set. (view)" sub-menu "Status" screen "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu "Status" screen "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu "Metering" screen
Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.
![Page 115: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 115/215
114
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5 Function Test
CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized using software, so it is possible to verify the overallcharacteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurableLED or a binary output relay.
Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for
logic level "0".
CAUTION
Use test equipment with more than 1 k of internal impedance when observing the outputsignal at the monitoring jacks.
Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.
In the case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phaseelement is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] settings are selected “3P” and “3PV”.
Note: The operating time test for the relay measuring elements at monitoring jacks A or Bdoes not include operation of the binary output. An overall operating time test, ifrequired, should be measured at a binary output relay.
Assign ing s ignals to LEDs
Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
> L E D
V i r t u a l L E D
Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen./ 3 L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
![Page 116: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 116/215
115
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4 L E D
> L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
L E D C o l o r
Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5 F u n c t i o n s
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _
I n ♯ 2 _ _ _
I n ♯ 3 _ _ _
I n ♯ 4 _ _ _
Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,and assign other gates to “0”.
Assigning s ignals to Binary Output Relays
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
![Page 117: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 117/215
116
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used,
enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/ 3 B O
> L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D l / D w / L a t
Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.
Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _
I n ♯ 2 _ _ _
I n ♯ 3 _ _ _
I n ♯ 4 _ _ _
T B O 0 . 2 0 s
Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix Aand assign other gates to “0”.
![Page 118: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 118/215
117
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.
Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit
Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Element Signal No. Element Signal No.
OV1 101 UV1 122
OV2 108 UV2 126
OV3 115 UV3 130
ZPS1 134 ZPS2 135
Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the valueat which the element operates.Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, ZPS1, ZPS2
Apply rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.
Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that themeasured value is within 5% of the setting.
Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3
Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.
Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that themeasured value is within 5% of the setting.
Operating t ime check of OV1, UV1, ZPS1 IDMT curves
Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure theoperating time.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.
TB 1
- 13
- 14
-12
GRE13
power supply
V TB 1
Variable -
Voltage source
-1
-2
( ) :Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
![Page 119: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 119/215
118
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.2 Negative sequence overvo ltage element NPS1 and NPS2
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.
Three-phaseVoltagesource
TB1 -1
-3
-6
-5
Va
Vb
GRE130
-13
-14
-12
TB1powersupply
Vc
V
VN
Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element Signal No.
NPS1 136
NPS2 137
Apply a three-phase balanced voltage and the check the value of the operating voltage by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
Operating time check of NPS1 IDMT curve
Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure theoperating time.
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.
![Page 120: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 120/215
119
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.3 Frequency Elements
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.3.
B1 -13
-14
GRE130
powersupply
-1
-2
V B1f
Variable-
Frequency /Voltage source
-12
Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit
Frequency elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Element Signal No.
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
FVBLK
251
252
253
254
255
Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4
Note: Each element characteristic, overfrequency or underfrequency, is determined by the scheme
switch [FT1] to [FT4] settings. Check the scheme switch setting and characteristic of each element
before testing .
Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.
For the overfrequency characteristic,
Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that themeasured value is within 0.005Hz of the setting.
For the underfrequency characteristics,
Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check thatthe measured value is within 0.005Hz of the setting.
Undervoltage block test, FVBLK
Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency to operate an element.
Maintain the frequency at which the element is operating, and change the magnitude of thevoltage applied from the rated voltage to less than the FVBLK setting voltage. And then,check that the element resets.
6.5.2 Protection SchemeIn the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays operate after a simulated faultoccurs.
![Page 121: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 121/215
120
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record"screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix B. There are internal events and external events from binary input commands. Event recording from an external event can be checked by changing thestatus of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary inputcircuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record"screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD displayonly shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record"screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details onhow to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
6.6 Conjunct ive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, systemvoltage and their respective phase angles using the metering displays on the LCD screen.
Open the "Auto-supervision" screen and check that no message appears.
Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.
/ 2 M e t e r i n g
V a * * . * * k V
V b * * . * * k V
V c * * . * * k V
V e s * * . * * k V
V a b * * . * * k V
V b c * * . * * k V
V c a * * . * * k V
V 1 * * * . * k V
V 2 * * * . * k V
V 0 * * . * * k V
f * * . * * H z
Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values for either the primary side or the secondary
side by a setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)
6.6.2 Tripping Circui t Test
The tripping circuit, including the circuit breaker, is checked by forcibly operating the output relayand monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it has tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section6.4.3.
![Page 122: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 122/215
121
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Tripping circuit
Set the breaker to be closed.
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 2 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 3 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 4 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
F A I L 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.
Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER key.
Press the END key. Then the LCD will display the screen shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.
![Page 123: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 123/215
122
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binaryinput and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test proceduresare the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued from the binary output FAILrelay and the failure is indicated on the front panel by the LED indicators or LCD display. It is alsorecorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location
Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable
Err: SUM (Flash memory)
Err: RAM (SRAM)
Err: BRAM (Backup RAM)
Err: EEP (EEPROM)
Err: A/D (A/D converter)
Err: V0, Err: V2 (AC input circuit)(1) (2)
Err: DRIVER (BI,BO circuit)(1) (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
* ; Error level set in VT supervision function.
Alarms detected by the relay self-supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on theLCD. Table 6.7.2 shows LCD messages and alarm locations.
Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location
Message Failure location
Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable
ALM: VT (AC input circuit)(1) (2)
ALM: TC (Trip circuit)(1) (2)
ALM: CB (Circuit breaker)(1) (2)
ALM: TP COUNT (Trip count)(1) (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including peripheral circuits.
![Page 124: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 124/215
123
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
If there is no message is shown on the LCD it means that the failure location is either in the powersupply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the powersupply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in bothcases after checking if the correct voltage is applied to the relay.
If a failure is detected by the automatic supervision function or regular testing, replace the failed
relay unit.Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during a regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Correct power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the protection by replacing the relay.
Repairs at site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at component level is notrecommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (softwaretype form) as the relay to be replaced.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit
CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.
The procedure for relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:
Switch off the DC power supply.
Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit when the power supply isde-energized. It will take approximately 30 seconds for the voltage todischarge.
Remove the terminal blocks from the relay leaving the wiring in place. To remove the relay unit from the panel, the attachment screws must be removed. Insert the (spare) relay unit following the reverse procedure.
CAUTION To avoid risk of damage: When the attachment kits are removed, support the relay to ensure that it does not fall
from panel.
Ensure that the relay front cover panel is closed throughout the operation.
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.
Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
Connect the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 StorageThe spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C isrecommended for long-term storage.
WARNING
![Page 125: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 125/215
124
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
7. Putting Relay into Service
The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing thecommissioning tests or maintenance tests.
Check that all the external connections are correct.
Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clockare correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which arerecorded during the tests.
Press ▼ key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.
Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
![Page 126: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 126/215
125
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix A
Signal List
![Page 127: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 127/215
126
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents
0 Not in use
1 BI1 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI1
2 BI2 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI23 BI3 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI3
4 BI4 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI4
5 BI5 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI5
6 BI6 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI6
7 Not in use
8 Not in use
9 Not in use
10 Not in use
11 SET. GROUP1 BI command of change active setting group1
12 SET. GROUP2 BI command of change active setting group213 Not in use
14 Not in use
15 OV1 BLOCK BI command of OV1 protection scheme block
16 OV2 BLOCK BI command of OV2 protection scheme block
17 OV3 BLOCK BI command of OV3 protection scheme block
18 UV1 BLOCK BI command of UV1 protection scheme block
19 UV2 BLOCK BI command of UV2 protection scheme block
20 UV3 BLOCK BI command of UV3 protection scheme block
21 ZPS1 BLOCK BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block
22 ZPS2 BLOCK BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block23 NPS1 BLOCK BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block
24 NPS2 BLOCK BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block
25 TC FAIL BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
26 CB CONT OPN BI command of CB N/O contact
27 CB CONT CLS BI command of CB N/C contact
28 EXT TRIP-3PH BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
29 EXT TRIP-APH BI command of External trip (A Phase)
30 EXT TRIP-BPH BI command of External trip (B Phase)
31 EXT TRIP-CPH BI command of External trip (C Phase)
32 REMOTE RESET BI command of Remote reset33 SYNC CLOCK BI command of Synchronize Clock
34 STORE RECORD BI command of Store Disturbance Record
35 ALARM1 BI command of Alarm1
36 ALARM2 BI command of Alarm2
37 ALARM3 BI command of Alarm3
38 ALARM4 BI command of Alarm4
39 Not in use
40 Not in use
![Page 128: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 128/215
127
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents
41 Not in use
42 FRQ1 BLOCK BI command of FRQ1 protection scheme block
43 FRQ2 BLOCK BI command of FRQ2 protection scheme block
44 FRQ3 BLOCK BI command of FRQ3 protection scheme block45 FRQ4 BLOCK BI command of FRQ4 protection scheme block
46 Not in use
47 Not in use
48 Not in use
49 Not in use
50 Not in use
51 OV1-A INST OV1-A relay element start
52 OV1-B INST OV1-B relay element start
53 OV1-C INST OV1-C relay element start
54 Not in use55 Not in use
56 Not in use
57 OV2-A INST OV2-A relay element start
58 OV2-B INST OV2-B relay element start
59 OV2-C INST OV2-C relay element start
60 Not in use
61 Not in use
62 Not in use
63 OV1-A OV1-A relay element output
64 OV1-B OV1-B relay element output65 OV1-C OV1-C relay element output
66 OV2-A OV2-A relay element output
67 OV2-B OV2-B relay element output
68 OV2-C OV2-C relay element output
69 OV3-A OV3-A relay element output
70 OV3-B OV3-B relay element output
71 OV3-C OV3-C relay element output
72 UV1-A UV1-A relay element output
73 UV1-B UV1-B relay element output
74 UV1-C UV1-C relay element output75 UV2-A UV2-A relay element output
76 UV2-B UV2-B relay element output
77 UV2-C UV2-C relay element output
78 UV3-A UV3-A relay element output
79 UV3-B UV3-B relay element output
80 UV3-C UV3-C relay element output
81 Not in use
82 Not in use
83 Not in use
84 Not in use
![Page 129: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 129/215
128
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents
85 Not in use
86 Not in use
87 Not in use
88 Not in use89 Not in use
90 Not in use
91 Not in use
92 Not in use
93 ZPS1 ZPS1 relay element output
94 ZPS2 ZPS2 relay element output
95 NPS1 NPS1 relay element output
96 NPS2 NPS2 relay element output
97 VBLK UV protection scheme block
98 Not in use99 Not in use
100 Not in use
101 OV1 TRIP OV1 trip command
102 OV1-A TRIP OV1 trip command (A Phase)
103 OV1-B TRIP OV1 trip command (B Phase)
104 OV1-C TRIP OV1 trip command (C Phase)
105 Not in use
106 Not in use
107 Not in use
108 OV2 TRIP OV2 trip command109 OV2-A TRIP OV2 trip command (A Phase)
110 OV2-B TRIP OV2 trip command (B Phase)
111 OV2-C TRIP OV2 trip command (C Phase)
112 Not in use
113 Not in use
114 Not in use
115 OV3 TRIP OV3 trip command
116 OV3-A TRIP OV3 trip command (A Phase)
117 OV3-B TRIP OV3 trip command (B Phase)
118 OV3-C TRIP OV3 trip command (C Phase)119 Not in use
120 Not in use
121 Not in use
122 UV1 TRIP UV1 trip command
123 UV1-A TRIP UV1 trip command (A Phase)
124 UV1-B TRIP UV1 trip command (B Phase)
125 UV1-C TRIP UV1 trip command (C Phase)
126 UV2 TRIP UV2 trip command
127 UV2-A TRIP UV2 trip command (A Phase)
128 UV2-B TRIP UV2 trip command (B Phase)129 UV2-C TRIP UV2 trip command (C Phase)
![Page 130: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 130/215
129
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents
130 UV3 TRIP UV3 trip command
131 UV3-A TRIP UV3 trip command (A Phase)
132 UV3-B TRIP UV3 trip command (B Phase)
133 UV3-C TRIP UV3 trip command (C Phase)134 ZPS1 TRIP ZPS1 trip command
135 ZPS2 ALARM ZPS2 alarm command
136 NPS1 TRIP NPS1 trip command
137 NPS2 ALARM NPS2 alarm command
138 Not in use
139 Not in use
140 Not in use
141 GEN.TRIP General Trip command
142 GEN.TRIP-A General Trip command (A Phase)
143 GEN.TRIP-B General Trip command (B Phase)144 GEN.TRIP-C General Trip command (C Phase)
145 Not in use
146 Not in use
147 Not in use
148 Not in use
149 Not in use
150 GEN.ALARM General alarm command
151 Not in use
152 Not in use
153 Not in use154 Not in use
155 Not in use
156
157 UV1-A INST UV1-A relay element start
158 UV1-B INST UV1-B relay element start
159 UV1-C INST UV1-C relay element start
160 A.M.F.OFF Automatic monitoring function off
161 RELAY FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
162 RELAY FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
163 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure164 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
165 TC ALARM Trip counter alarm
166 Not in use
167 OT ALARM Operate time alarm
168 V0 ERR V0 error
169 V2 ERR V2 error
170 BO1OP Binary Output1 operated
171 BO2OP Binary Output2 operated
172 BO3OP Binary Output3 operated
173 BO4OP Binary Output4 operated
![Page 131: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 131/215
130
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents
174 Not in use
175 Not in use
176 Not in use
177 UV2-A INST UV2-A relay element start178 UV2-B INST UV2-B relay element start
179 UV2-C INST UV2-C relay element start
180 Not in use
181 LCD IND. LCD indication (Virtual LED) command
182 LCD IND1. LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command
183 LCD IND2. LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command
184 Not in use
185 Not in use
186 TESTING Testing LED lit output
187 Not in use188 Not in use
189 Not in use
190 Not in use
191 Not in use
192 Not in use
193 Not in use
194 Not in use
195 Not in use
196 Not in use
197 ZPS1 INST ZPS1 relay element start198 ZPS2 INST ZPS2 relay element start
199 NPS1 INST NPS1 relay element start
200 NPS2 INST NPS2 relay element start
201 Not in use
202 Not in use
203 Not in use
204 Not in use
205 Not in use
206 Not in use
207 Not in use208 Not in use
209 Not in use
210 Not in use
211 F11 FRQ1 relay F11 element output
212 F12 FRQ1 relay F12 element output
213 DF-R1 DFRQ1 relay rise element output
214 DF-D1 DFRQ1 relay decay element output
215 F21 FRQ2 relay F21 element output
216 F22 FRQ2 relay F22 element output
217 DF-R2 DFRQ2 relay rise element output
![Page 132: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 132/215
131
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents
218 DF-D2 DFRQ2 relay decay element output
219 F31 FRQ3 relay F31 element output
220 F32 FRQ3 relay F32 element output
221 DF-R3 DFRQ3 relay rise element output222 DR-D3 DFRQ3 relay decay element output
223 F41 FRQ4 relay F41 element output
224 F42 FRQ4 relay F42 element output
225 DF-R4 DFRQ4 relay rise element output
226 DF-D4 DFRQ4 relay decay element output
227 Not in use
228 Not in use
229 Not in use
230 Not in use
231 F11 TRIP FRQ1 relay F11 Trip command232 F12 TRIP FRQ1 relay F12 Trip command
233 DF-R1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay rise Trip command
234 DF-D1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay decay Trip command
235 FRQ1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command
236 F21 TRIP FRQ2 relay F21 Trip command
237 F22 TRIP FRQ2 relay F22 Trip command
238 DF-R2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay rise Trip command
239 DF-D2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay decay Trip command
240 FRQ2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command
241 F31 TRIP FRQ3 relay F31 Trip command242 F32 TRIP FRQ3 relay F32 Trip command
243 DF-R3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay rise Trip command
244 DF-D3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay decay Trip command
245 FRQ3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command
246 F41 TRIP FRQ4 relay F41 Trip command
247 F42 TRIP FRQ4 relay F42 Trip command
248 DF-R4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay rise Trip command
249 DF-D4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay decay Trip command
250 FRQ4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command
251 FRQ STAGE1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command252 FRQ STAGE2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command
253 FRQ STAGE3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command
254 FRQ STAGE4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command
255 FVBLK Frequency element scheme block
256 Not in use
257 Not in use
258 Not in use
259 Not in use
260 Not in use
270 LOCAL Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state271 REMOTE Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state
![Page 133: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 133/215
132
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents
272 CB_OPN_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open
273 CB_CLS_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close
274 CB_OPN_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker open275 CB_CLS_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker close
276 CB_OPN_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker open
277 CB_CLC_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker close
278 LOCK_BI BI command of Interlock
279 LOCK_COMM Communication command of Interlock
280 CB OPOUT Circuit Breaker Open output
281 CB CLOUT Circuit Breaker Close output
282 Not in use
283 Not in use
284 Not in use285 Not in use
286 IDMT_s1_a OV1 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
287 IDMT_s1_b OV1 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
288 IDMT_s1_c OV1 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
289 IDMT_s1_n ZPS1 integrated value = 0
290 IDMT_s1_z NPS1 integrated value = 0
291 IDMT_s2_a OV2 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
292 IDMT_s2_b OV2 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
293 IDMT_s2_c OV2 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
294 IDMT_s2_n ZPS2 integrated value = 0295 IDMT_s2_z NPS2 integrated value = 0
296 Not in use
297 Not in use
298 Not in use
299 Not in use
300 Not in use
![Page 134: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 134/215
133
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix BEvent Record Items
![Page 135: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 135/215
134
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ID. LCD indication Contents
1 GEN.trip Off / On General trip command
2 GEN.trip-A Off / On General trip command (A Phase)
3 GEN.trip-B Off / On General trip command (B Phase)4 GEN.trip-C Off / On General trip command (C Phase)
5 GEN.trip-AB Off / On General trip command (A-B Phase)
6 GEN.trip-BC Off / On General trip command (B-C Phase)
7 GEN.trip-CA Off / On General trip command (C-A Phase)
8 OV1-A trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A Phase)
9 OV1-B trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B Phase)
10 OV1-C trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C Phase)
11 OV2-A trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A Phase)
12 OV2-B trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B Phase)
13 OV2-C trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C Phase)14 OV3-A alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A Phase)
15 OV3-B alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B Phase)
16 OV3-C alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C Phase)
17 UV1-A trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A Phase)
18 UV1-B trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B Phase)
19 UV1-C trip Off / On UV1 trip command (C Phase)
20 UV2-A trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A Phase)
21 UV2-B trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B Phase)
22 UV2-C trip Off / On UV2 trip command (C Phase)
23 UV3-A alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A Phase)
24 UV3-B alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B Phase)25 UV3-C alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C Phase)
26 OV1-AB trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A-B Phase)
27 OV1-BC trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B-C Phase)
28 OV1-CA trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C-A Phase)
29 OV2-AB trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A-B Phase)
30 OV2-BC trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B-C Phase)
31 OV2-CA trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C-A Phase)
32 OV3-AB alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)
33 OV3-BC alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)
34 OV3-CA alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)35 UV1-AB trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A-B Phase)
36 UV1-BC trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B-C Phase)
37 UV1-CA trip Off / On UV1 trip command(C-A Phase)
38 UV2-AB trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A-B Phase)
39 UV2-BC trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B-C Phase)
40 UV2-CA trip Off / On UV2 trip command(C-A Phase)
41 UV3-AB alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)
42 UV3-BC alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)
![Page 136: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 136/215
135
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents
43 UV3-CA alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)
44 OV1 trip Off / On OV1 trip command
45 OV2 trip Off / On OV2 trip command
46 OV3 trip Off / On OV3 trip command47 UV1 trip Off / On UV1 trip command
48 UV2 trip Off / On UV2 trip command
49 UV3 trip Off / On UV3 trip command
50 ZPS1 trip Off / On ZPS1 trip command
51 ZPS2 alarm Off / On ZPS2 alarm command
52 NPS1 trip Off / On NPS1 trip command
53 NPS2 alarm Off / On NPS2 alarm command
54 OV1-A Off / On OV1-A relay element operating
55 OV1-B Off / On OV1-B relay element operating
56 OV1-C Off / On OV1-C relay element operating
57 OV2-A Off / On OV2-A relay element operating58 OV2-B Off / On OV2-B relay element operating
59 OV2-C Off / On OV2-C relay element operating
60 OV3-A Off / On OV3-A relay element operating
61 OV3-B Off / On OV3-B relay element operating
62 OV3-C Off / On OV3-C relay element operating
63 UV1-A Off / On UV1-A relay element operating
64 UV1-B Off / On UV1-B relay element operating
65 UV1-C Off / On UV1-C relay element operating
66 UV2-A Off / On UV2-A relay element operating
67 UV2-B Off / On UV2-B relay element operating68 UV2-C Off / On UV2-C relay element operating
69 UV3-A Off / On UV3-A relay element operating
70 UV3-B Off / On UV3-B relay element operating
71 UV3-C Off / On UV3-C relay element operating
72 OV1-AB Off / On OV1-AB relay element operating
73 OV1-BC Off / On OV1-BC relay element operating
74 OV1-CA Off / On OV1-CA relay element operating
75 OV2-AB Off / On OV2-AB relay element operating
76 OV2-BC Off / On OV2-BC relay element operating
77 OV2-CA Off / On OV2-CA relay element operating
78 OV3-AB Off / On OV3-AB relay element operating
79 OV3-BC Off / On OV3-BC relay element operating
80 OV3-CA Off / On OV3-CA relay element operating
81 UV1-AB Off / On UV1-AB relay element operating
82 UV1-BC Off / On UV1-BC relay element operating
83 UV1-CA Off / On UV1-CA relay element operating
84 UV2-AB Off / On UV2-AB relay element operating
85 UV2-BC Off / On UV2-BC relay element operating
86 UV2-CA Off / On UV2-CA relay element operating
87 UV3-AB Off / On UV3-AB relay element operating
88 UV3-BC Off / On UV3-BC relay element operating
![Page 137: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 137/215
136
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents
89 UV3-CA Off / On UV3-CA relay element operating
90 OV1 Off / On OV1 relay element operating
91 OV2 Off / On OV2 relay element operating92 OV3 Off / On OV3 relay element operating
93 UV1 Off / On UV1 relay element operating
94 UV2 Off / On UV2 relay element operating
95 UV3 Off / On UV3 relay element operating
96 ZPS1 Off / On ZPS1 relay element operating
97 ZPS2 Off / On ZPS2 relay element operating
98 NPS1 Off / On NPS1 relay element operating
99 NPS2 Off / On NPS2 relay element operating
100 VBLK Off / On VBLK element operating
101 BI1 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI1
102 BI2 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI2103 BI3 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI3
104 BI4 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI4
105 BI5 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI5
106 BI6 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI6
107 SET. group1 Off / On BI command of change active setting group1
108 SET. group2 Off / On BI command of change active setting group2
109 OV1 block Off / On BI command of OV1 protection scheme block
110 OV2 block Off / On BI command of OV2 protection scheme block
111 OV3 block Off / On BI command of OV3 protection scheme block
112 UV1 block Off / On BI command of UV1 protection scheme block113 UV2 block Off / On BI command of UV2 protection scheme block
114 UV3 block Off / On BI command of UV3 protection scheme block
115 ZPS1 block Off / On BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block
116 ZPS2 block Off / On BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block
117 NPS1 block Off / On BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block
118 NPS2 block Off / On BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block
119 TC fail Off / On BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
120 CB CONT OPN Off / On BI command of CB N/O contact
121 CB CONT CLS Off / On BI command of CB N/C contact
122 EXT trip-3PH Off / On BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
123 EXT trip-APH Off / On BI command of External trip (A Phase)
124 EXT trip-BPH Off / On BI command of External trip (B Phase)
125 EXT trip-CPH Off / On BI command of External trip (C Phase)
126 Remote reset Off / On BI command of Remote reset
127 SYNC Off / On
128 Store record Off / On BI command of Store Disturbance Record
129 Alarm1 Off / On BI command of Alarm1
130 Alarm2 Off / On BI command of Alarm2
131 Alarm3 Off / On BI command of Alarm3
132 Alarm4 Off / On BI command of Alarm4
133 Relay fail Off / On Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
![Page 138: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 138/215
137
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents No.
134 Relay fail-A Off / On Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
135 TC err Off / On Trip circuit supervision failure
136 CB err Off / On Circuit Breaker failure
137 V0 err Off / On Zero phase input circuit failure138 V2 err Off / On VT circuit supervision failure
139 TP COUNT ALM Off / On Trip counter alarm
140 F.record CLR On Clear Fault records
141 E.record CLR On Clear Event records
142 D.record CLR On Clear Disturbance records
143 TP COUNT On Clear Trip counter
144 IND.reset On Reset indication for Trip mode, Alarm etc.
145 Data lost OnRecord and time for data lost with power supply
de-energized for an extended period
146 Sys.Set Change On System setting change command
147 Rly.Set Change On Relay setting change command148 Grp.Set Change On Group setting change command
149 OV1-A INST Off / On OV1-A relay element start
150 OV1-B INST Off / On OV1-B relay element start
151 OV1-C INST Off / On OV1-C relay element start
152 OV2-A INST Off / On OV2-A relay element start
153 OV2-B INST Off / On OV2-B relay element start
154 OV2-C INST Off / On OV2-C relay element start
155 UV1-A INST Off / On UV1-A relay element start
156 UV1-B INST Off / On UV1-B relay element start
157 UV1-C INST Off / On UV1-C relay element start158 UV2-A INST Off / On UV2-A relay element start
159 UV2-B INST Off / On UV2-B relay element start
160 UV2-C INST Off / On UV2-C relay element start
161 OV1-AB INST Off / On OV1-AB relay element start
162 OV1-BC INST Off / On OV1-BC relay element start
163 OV1-CA INST Off / On OV1-CA relay element start
164 OV2-AB INST Off / On OV2-AB relay element start
165 OV2-BC INST Off / On OV2-BC relay element start
166 OV2-CA INST Off / On OV2-CA relay element start
167 UV1-AB INST Off / On UV1-AB relay element start
168 UV1-BC INST Off / On UV1-BC relay element start
169 UV1-CA INST Off / On UV1-CA relay element start
170 UV2-AB INST Off / On UV2-AB relay element start
171 UV2-BC INST Off / On UV2-BC relay element start
172 UV2-CA INST Off / On UV2-CA relay element start
173 OV1 INST Off / On OV1 relay element start
174 OV2 INST Off / On OV2 relay element start
175 UV1 INST Off / On UV1 relay element start
176 UV2 INST Off / On UV2 relay element start
177 ZPS1 INST Off / On ZPS1 relay element start
178 ZPS2 INST Off / On ZPS2 relay element start
![Page 139: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 139/215
138
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents No.
179 NPS1 INST Off / On NPS1 relay element start
180 NPS2 INST Off / On NPS2 relay element start
181 FREQ1 trip Off / On FREQ1 relay element operating
182 FREQ2 trip Off / On FREQ2 relay element operating183 FREQ3 trip Off / On FREQ3 relay element operating
184 FREQ4 trip Off / On FREQ4 relay element operating
185 FREQ1 block Off / On BI command of FREQ1 protection scheme block
186 FREQ2 block Off / On BI command of FREQ2 protection scheme block
187 FREQ3 block Off / On BI command of FREQ3 protection scheme block
188 FREQ4 block Off / On BI command of FREQ4 protection scheme block
189 Local Off / On CB Control hierarchy Local state
190 Remote Off / On CB Control hierarchy Remote state
191 CB OPC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Open
192 CB CLC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Close
193 CB OPC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Open194 CB CLC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Close
195 CB OPC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Open
196 CB CLC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Close
197 LOCK_BI Off / On BI command of Interlock
198 LOCK_COMM Off / On Communication command of Interlock
199 CB OPOUT Off / On CB Open Output
200 CB CLOUT Off / On CB Close Output
201
202
203
![Page 140: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 140/215
139
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix C
Binary Output Default Setting List
![Page 141: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 141/215
140
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
RelayModel
BO
No.
Terminal
No.
Signal
Name
Contents Setting
Signal No. Logic
(OR:0, AND:1)
Reset
(Inst:0, Del:1Latch:2)
GRE130
-410
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
R.F.
TB2:
1 - 2
3 – 4
5 - 6
7 - 8
9 - 10
NON
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
NON
Relay fail
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
Relay alarm (General)
Off
0
141
150
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
GRE130
-411
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
R.F.
TB2:
1 - 2
3 – 4
5 - 6
7 - 8
9 - 10
NON
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
NON
Relay fail
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)(Link to CB Open SW)
Relay alarm (General)
Off
0
141
150
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
![Page 142: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 142/215
141
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix D
Details of Relay Menu andLCD & Button Operation
![Page 143: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 143/215
142
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1
a-1 -1
a-1 b-1
MAI N MENU
RecordSt at usSet . ( vi ew)
Set . ( change)Cont rol Test
Cl ear records?END=Y CANCEL=N
/ 4 Faul t #116/ J ul / 2010
Cl ear records?END=Y CANCEL=N
Cl ear records?END=Y CANCEL=N
/ 2 Faul tVi ew recordCl ear
/ 3 Faul t
#1 16/ J ul / 201018: 13: 57. 031
/ 3 Di st urbance
#1 16/ J ul / 201018: 13: 57. 401
/ 2 EventVi ew recordCl ear
/ 3 Event
16/ J ul / 2010Ext . t r i p A On
/ 2 Di st urbance
Vi ew recordCl ear
Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 3. 1.
Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 3. 2.
Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 3. 3.
/ 1 Record
Faul t
Event
Di st urbance
Count er
![Page 144: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 144/215
143
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Cl ear Tr i ps?END=Y CANCEL=N
/ 3 Count er Tri ps ***** Tri psA *****
Tri psB ***** Tri psC *****
/ 2 Count erVi ew count erCl ear Tr i ps
Cl ear Tr i ps ACl ear Tr i ps BCl ear Tr i ps C
Cl ear Tr i ps A?END=Y CANCEL=N
Cl ear Tr i ps B?END=Y CANCEL=N
Cl ear Tr i ps C?END=Y CANCEL=N
Cl ear I yA?END=Y CANCEL=N
Cl ear I yB?END=Y CANCEL=N
Cl ear I yC?END=Y CANCEL=N
![Page 145: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 145/215
144
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a- 1, -1
a-1
/ 2 Met er i ngVa **. ** kV
/ 2 16/ J ul / 201022: 56: 19 [ L]
/ 2 Bi nary I / O
I P [ 0000 00 ]
/ 2 Ry el ementAN OV1- 4[0000 ]
/ 2 Ti me sync.*BI : Act .
/ 2 LCD cont rast
/ 1 St at usMet er i ngBi nary I / ORel ay el ement
Ti me sync.Cl ock adj ust .LCD cont rast
/ 1 Set . ( vi ew)Versi onDescri pt i onCommsRecordSt at usProt ecti onBi nary I / PBi nary O/ PLEDCont rolFr equency
Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 4.
/ 2 Versi onRel ay t ypeSof t ware
/ 2 Descri pt i onPl ant nameDescri pt i on
Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 5
GS1EM1- 03- *
/ 2 CommsAddr .Swi t ch
GRE130- 401A- 10- 10
/ 3 Addr .Addr . *
/ 3 Swi t ch
![Page 146: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 146/215
![Page 147: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 147/215
146
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1
a-1 b-1 c-1 d- 1
Al arm Text
/ 3 Group2
Parameter
/ 6 OV prot .
/ 4 Tr i pScheme swProt . el ement
/ 5 Scheme swAppl i cat i onOV prot .
UV prot .ZPS prot .NPS prot .FRQ prot.
/ 5 Prot . el ementOV prot .UV prot .ZPS prot .NPS prot .FRQ prot .
/ 6 UV prot .
/ 6 ZPS prot .
/ 6 FRQ prot .
/ 6 OV prot .OV1 10. 0V
/ 6 UV prot .UV1 10. 0V
/ 6 ZPS prot .
ZPS1 10. 0V
/ 6 FRQ prot .FRQ1 10. 0Hz
/ 2 Bi nary I / PBI STATUSBI 1BI 2BI 3BI 4BI 5
BI 6Al arm1 TextAl arm2 TextAl arm3 TextAl arm4 Text
/ 3 BI 1 Ti mersFunct i ons
/ 3 BI 6 Ti mersFunct i ons
/ 4 Ti mersBI 1PUD 0. 00s
/ 4 Funct i ons
/ 6 Appl i cat i on
/ 3 BI STATUS
/ 6 NPS prot .
/ 6 NPS prot .NPS1 10. 0V
![Page 148: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 148/215
147
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 4.
Set . ( change)I nput [ _ ]
1234567890
Set . ( change)Ret ype [ _ ]
1234567890
: Confirmation trap
: Password trap
Set . ( change)Password [ _ ]
1234567890
Change set t i ngs?ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
_ABCDEFG
_ABCDEFG
/ 2 Descri pt i onPl ant nameDescri pt i on
Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 3.
/ 3 LED
/ 2 Bi nary O/ P
BO1 AND, DL0, 0, 0, 0
BO4 OR , Lat141, 1, 2, 3
Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 2.
a-1 b-1
a-1 b-2
/ 2 CommsAddr .Swi t ch
/ 3 Addr .Addr
/ 3 Swi t ch
RS485
/ 1 Set . ( change)PasswordDescri pt i onCommsRecordSt at usProt ect i on
Bi nary I / PBi nary O/ PLEDCont rolFr equency
/ 2 LEDLEDVi r t ual LED
/ 3 Vi r t ual LEDI ND1I ND2
/ 4 I ND1BI T1 I , O
/ 4 I ND2BI T1 I , O
/ 2 Cont rol
/ 2 Frequency
![Page 149: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 149/215
148
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-2 c- 2 d-2
a-1 b- 2
/ 4 Ti me/ star t er
/ 4 Scheme sw
/ 2 RecordEventDi st urbanceCounter
/ 3 Di st urbance Ti me/ st ar t erScheme swBi nary si g.
/ 3 Met er i ngDi spl ay
/ 3 Ti me sync. Ti me sync.
/ 2 St at usMeter i ng Ti me sync.
/ 2 Prot ecti onChange act . gp.Change set.Copy gp.
/ 3 Change act.
gp.
/ 3 Act gp. =1CommonGroup1Group2
Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 7.
Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 6.
Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 5.
/ 4 Scheme sw
/ 4 Al armset
/ 3 Count erScheme swAl armset
/ 4 Bi nary si g.
/ 3 EventBI 1 comm.BI 1 comm. 3 _ N/ O/ R/ B
::
/ 4 Common
APPL
![Page 150: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 150/215
149
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b- 2 c-2 d- 2
_ABCDEFG
/ 4 Group1Parameter Tri p
/ 5 ParameterLi ne nameCT rat i o
/ 4 Group2Parameter
/ 6 VT rat i oVTS
/ 5 Tr i pScheme swProt . el ement
/ 7 OV prot .
/ 6 Scheme swAppl i cat i onOV prot .UV prot .ZPS prot .NPS prot .FRQ prot .
/ 6 Prot . el ementOV prot .UV prot .ZPS prot .
NPS prot .FRQ prot .
/ 7 UV prot .
/ 7 ZPS prot .
/ 7 FRQ prot .
/ 7 OV prot .
/ 7 UV prot .
/ 7 ZPS prot .
/ 7 FRQ prot .
/ 7 Appl i cat i on
a-1, b- 2 c- 2
/ 7 NPS prot .
/ 7 NPS prot .
![Page 151: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 151/215
150
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 3 Copy A t o BA _B _
Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 8.
/ 4 Logi c/ Reset
/ 4 Funct i ons
/ 3 BO1Logi c/ ResetFunct i ons
/ 2 Bi nary O/ PBO1BO2
BO3BO4 / 3 BO4
Logi c/ ResetFunct i ons
Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 10.
Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 9.
/ 2 Bi nary I / PBI St at usBI 1BI 2BI 3BI 4BI 5
BI 6Al arm1 TextAl arm2 TextAl arm3 TextAl arm4 Text
/ 3 BI 1 Ti mersFunct i ons
/ 3 BI 6
Ti mersFunct i ons
ABCDEFG
/ 4 Ti mers
/ 4 Funct i ons
Al arm Text
a-1 b-2 c-2
a-1 b-2 c-3
/ 5 Logi c/ Reset
/ 5 Funct i ons
/ 4 LED1Logi c/ ResetFunct i onsLED Col or
/ 3 LEDLED1LED2LED3LED4LED5LED6CB CLOSED
/ 4 LED6Logi c/ ResetFunct i onsLED Col or
/ 2 LEDLEDVi r t ual LED
/ 5 LED Col or
/ 4 CB CLOSEDLED Col or
/ 5 LED Col or
/ 3 BI St at usBI THR1
![Page 152: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 152/215
151
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Operate?ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
/ 1 TestPassword( Test )Swi t chBi nary O/ P
/ 2 Swi t ch
A. M. F. 1 _Of f / OnUVTST 0Of f / S0/ S3
/ 2 Bi nary O/ P
BO1 0 _Di sabl e/ Enabl e
BO4 0Di sabl e/ Enabl e
Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 8.
a-1 b-2 c-3
/ 3 Vi r t ual LEDI ND1I ND2
/ 5 Reset
/ 5 Funct i ons
/ 4 I ND1ResetFunct i ons
/ 4 I ND2ResetFunct i ons
Cont rolI nput [ _ ]
1234567890
Cont rolRet ype [ _ ]
1234567890 Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 7. 2.
/ 1 Cont rolPassword( Ct r l )Local / RemoteCB OPEN/ CLOSE
Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 7
: Password trap
Cont rolPassword [ _ ]
1234567890
TestI nput [ _ ]
1234567890
TestRet ype [ _ ]
1234567890 Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 8. 2. : Password trap
TestPassword [ _ ]
1234567890
/ 2 Cont rol
/ 2 Frequency
![Page 153: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 153/215
152
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix E
Case Outline
![Page 154: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 154/215
153
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Rear View Panel cut-out2 holes-φ4
for Panel mounting kit
143
1 6 0
1 23 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
TB2
TB1
RJ45
for Optional Unit
Terminal block
TB2
TB1
1 7 7
149 17 127 24
Front View Side View
Case Outline
![Page 155: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 155/215
154
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix F
Typical External Connection
![Page 156: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 156/215
155
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
CLOSE
COIL
Vph
Ve
CB CLOSE
SW
Relay fail
TB1
12
34567891011121314
CB OPEN
SW
TRIP
COIL
P
N
FG
POWER
SUPPLY+-
GND
12
3
456
78
9101112
1314
1516
1718192022
212324
TB2
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN/TRIP
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Control
Power
N.C.
GRE130-410A
APPL ; 1PP
N.C.
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
A+B-
COM
Relay fail
indicator
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS(CB OPEN)FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
Rear PANEL
RJ45 N.C.
N.C.
*
*
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
BO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
Controled
CB
COMA+B-
COM
A+B-
P
N
N
N
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 1PP setting
![Page 157: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 157/215
156
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
CLOSE
COIL
Vph
Ve
CB CLOSE
SW
Relay fail
TB1
1
234567891011121314
CB OPEN
SW
TRIP
COIL
P
N
FG
POWER
SUPPLY+-
GND
12
34
56
78
9101112
1314
1516
1718192022
212324
TB2
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN/TRIP
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
ControlPower
N.C.
GRE130-411A
APPL ; 1PN
N.C.
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Threshold33.6/77/154V
A+B-
COM
Relay fail
indicator
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
Rear PANEL
RJ45 N.C.
*
*
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
Controled
CB
Threshold
77/154V
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
COMA+B-
COM
A+B-
P
N
N
N
(CB CLOSED)
(CB OPEN)
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 411A 1PN setting
![Page 158: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 158/215
157
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
CLOSE
COIL
Vab
Vbc
Ve
CB CLOSE
SW
Relay fail
TB1
1234567891011121314
CB OPEN
SW
TRIP
COIL
P
N
FG
POWER
SUPPLY+-
GND
12
34
56
78
9101112
13
141516
1718192022
212324
TB2
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN/TRIP
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Control
Power
N.C.
GRE130-410A
APPL ; 2PP
2PZ
N.C.
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
A+B-
COM
Relay fail
indicator
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
Rear PANEL
RJ45 N.C.
N.C.
*
*
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIP
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
Controled
CB
COMA+B-
COM
A+B-
P
N
N
N
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB OPEN)
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 2PP ( 2PZ ) setting
![Page 159: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 159/215
158
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 3PN ( 3PV ) setting
![Page 160: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 160/215
159
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
CLOSE
COIL
Vab
Vbc
Vca
Ve
CB CLOSE
SW
Relay fail
TB1
1234567891011121314
CB OPENSW
TRIP
COIL
P
N
FG
POWER
SUPPLY+-
GND
12
34
56
78
9101112
1314
1516
1718192022
212324
TB2
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN/TRIP
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Control
Power
N.C.
GRE130-410A
APPL ; 3PP
N.C.
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
A+B-
COM
Relay fail
indicator
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB OPEN)
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
Rear PANEL
RJ45 N.C.
N.C.
*
*
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIP
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
Controled
CB
COMA+B-
COM
A+B-
P
N
N
N
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 3PP setting
![Page 161: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 161/215
160
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix G
Relay Sett ing Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
![Page 162: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 162/215
161
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Relay Identification Date:
Relay type Serial Number
Frequency AC voltage
DC supply voltage Active setting group
Password
Setting
Control
Test
2. Line parameter
VT ratio PVT: RVT:
3. Contacts settingTB2
BO1 Terminal 1-2
BO2 Terminal 3-4
BO3 Terminal 5-6
BO4 Terminal 7-8
BI1 Terminal 13-14
BI2 Terminal 15-16
BI3 Terminal 17-22BI4 Terminal 18-22
BI5 Terminal 19-22
BI6 Terminal 20-22
![Page 163: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 163/215
162
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. Relay setting sheet
Menu Name Range Contents Default
Password(Set) 0000 – 9999Password for
Setting change
None
(0000)
Password(Ctrl) 0000 – 9999 Password for Control None
(0000)Password
Password(Test) 0000 – 9999 Password for Test None
(0000)
Plant name Specified by user Plant name -
DescriptionDescription ditto
Memorandum
for user-
Addr. 1 - 247Relay ID No.
for Modbus
1Communi
-cationRS485 9.6 / 19.2 Baud rate for Modbus 19.2
BI1 comm. None/Operate/
Reset/BothBI1 command trigger
Both(3)
BI2 comm. None/Operate/
Reset/BothBI2 command trigger
Both(3)
BI3 comm. None/Operate/
Reset/BothBI3 command trigger
Both(3)
BI4 comm. None/Operate/
Reset/BothBI4 command trigger
Both(3)
BI5 comm. None/Operate/
Reset/BothBI5 command trigger
Both(3)
Event
Record
BI6 comm. None/Operate/
Reset/BothBI6 command trigger
Both(3)
Time1 0.1 – 4.9 sRecording period
before fault
3.0
Time2 0.1 – 4.9 sRecording period
after fault
2.0
OV 10.0 – 200.0 VOV element
for disturbance
UV 1.0 – 130.0 VUV element
for disturbance
NPS 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS element
for disturbance
ZPS 1.0 – 160.0 VZPS element
for disturbance
Trip Off / On Disturbance trigger OnBI Off / On Disturbance trigger On
OV Off / On Disturbance trigger On
Disturbance
Record
![Page 164: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 164/215
163
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu Name Range Contents Default
UV Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
NPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
ZPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
SIG1 0 - 350 51
SIG2 0 – 350 52SIG3 0 – 350 53
SIG4 0 – 350 63
SIG5 0 – 350 102
SIG6 0 – 350 103
SIG7 0 – 350 104
SIG8 0 – 350 117
SIG9 0 – 350 141
SIG10 0 – 350 142
SIG11 0 – 350 143
SIG12 0 – 350 144
SIG13 0 – 350 145SIG14 0 – 350 0
SIG15 0 – 350 0
SIG16…30 0 – 350 0
SIG31 0 – 350 0
Disturbance
Record
SIG32 0 – 350
Disturbance Trigger
0
TCSPEN Off / On / Opt-OnTrip Circuit
Supervision Enable
Off
CBSMEN Off / On
Circuit Breaker
State Monitoring
Alarm Enable
Off
TCAEN Off / On Trip Count AlarmEnable Off
Counter
TCALM 1 – 10000Trip Count Alarm
Threshold
10000
Display Pri / Sec Metering Pri
Time sync. Off / BI / Modbus Time OffStatus
![Page 165: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 165/215
164
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu Name Range Contents Default
BITHR1 48 / 110 /220 BI1,BI2 Threshold 110
BITHR2 110 / 220 BI3-BI6 Threshold 110
BI1PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI1DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Drop-off delay 0.00BI1SNS Norm / Inv BI1 Trigger Norm
BI1SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI1 Settings Group Off
OV1BLK Off / On OV1 Block Off
OV2BLK Off / On OV2 Block Off
OV3BLK Off / On OV3 Block Off
UV1BLK Off / On UV1 Block Off
UV2BLK Off / On UV2 Block Off
UV3BLK Off / On UV3 Block Off
ZP1BLK Off / On ZPS1 Block Off
ZP2BLK Off / On ZPS2 Block Off
NP1BLK Off / On NPS1 Block Off NP2BLK Off / On NPS2 Block Off
TCFALM Off / OnTrip Circuit
Fail Alarm
Off
CBOPN Off / OnCircuit Breaker
Open
Off
CBCLS Off / OnCircuit Breaker
Closed
Off
EXT3PH Off / OnExternal Trip
– 3 Phase
Off
EXTAPH Off / OnExternal Trip
– A Phase
Off
EXTBPH Off / OnExternal Trip
– B Phase
Off
EXTCPH Off / OnExternal Trip
– C Phase
Off
RMTRST Off / On Remote Reset Off
SYNCLK Off / On Synchronize clock Off
STORCD Off / OnStore Disturbance
Record
Off
Alarm1 Off / On Alarm screen 1 Off
Alarm2 Off / On Alarm screen 2 Off
Alarm3 Off / On Alarm screen 3 Off
Alarm4 Off / On Alarm screen 4 Off
RMTOPN Off / OnRemote CB
Open Control
Off
RMTCLS Off / OnRemote CB
Close Control
Off
Binary
InputBI1
![Page 166: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 166/215
165
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu Name Range Contents Default
CNTLCK Off / On Interlock input Off
FRQ1BLK Off / On FRQ1 Block Off
FRQ2BLK Off / On FRQ2 Block Off
FRQ3BLK Off / On FRQ3 Block Off
BI1
FRQ4BLK Off / On FRQ4 Block Off
BI2PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI2 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI2DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI2 Drop-off
delay
0.00
BI2SNS Norm / Inv BI2 Trigger Norm
BI2SGS Off / 1 / 2BI2 Settings
Group
Off
BI2
The following items are same as BI1
BI3PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI3 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI3DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI3 Drop-off
delay
0.00
BI3SNS Norm / Inv BI3 Trigger Norm
BI3SGS Off / 1 / 2BI3 Settings
Group
Off
BI3
The following items are same as BI1
BI4PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI4 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI4DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI4 Drop-off
delay
0.00
BI4SNS Norm / Inv BI4 Trigger Norm
BI4SGS Off / 1 / 2BI4 Settings
Group
Off
BI4
The following items are same as BI1
BI5PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI5 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI5DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI5 Drop-off
delay
0.00
BI5SNS Norm / Inv BI5 Trigger Norm
BI5SGS Off / 1 / 2BI5 Settings
Group
Off
BI5
The following items are same as BI1
BI6PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI6 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI6DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI6 Drop-off
delay
0.00
BI6SNS Norm / Inv BI6 Trigger Norm
BI6SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI6 SettingsGroup
Off
BI6
The following items are same as BI1
Alarm1 Text Specified by user Alarm1 Text Alarm1
Alarm2 Text Specified by user Alarm2 Text Alarm2
Alarm3 Text Specified by user Alarm3 Text Alarm3
Binary
Input
Alarm4 Text Specified by user Alarm4 Text Alarm4
![Page 167: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 167/215
166
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu Name Range Contents Default
Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR
Reset Ins / DI / Dw / Lat Reset Operation DI
In #1 0 – 350 Functions 141
In #2 0 – 350 Functions 0In #3 0 – 350 Functions 0
In #4 0 – 350 Functions 0
BO1
TBO 0.00 – 10.00 s Delay / Pulse width 0.20
BO2 Same as BO1
BO3 Same as BO1
Binary
Output
BO4 Same as BO1
Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR
Reset Inst / Latch Reset Operation Inst
In #1 0 – 350 Functions 0
In #2 0 – 350 Functions 0
In #3 0 – 350 Functions 0In #4 0 – 350 Functions 0
LED1
Color R / G / Y LED Color R
LED2 Same as LED1
LED3 Same as LED1
LED4 Same as LED1
LED5 Same as LED1
CB CLOSED Color R / G / YCB CLOSED LED
Color
R
IND1 Reset Inst / LatchIND1 Reset
operation
Inst
IND2 Reset Inst / Latch
IND2 Reset
operation
Inst
BIT1 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
BIT2 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
BIT3 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
BIT4 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
BIT5 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
BIT6 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
BIT7 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
IND1
BIT8 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0
Confi-
gurable
LED
IND2 Same as IND1
Active gp. 1 - 2 Active setting group 1
AOLED Off / OnALARM LEDlighting control
at alarm output
On
Control Disable / Enable Control Enable Disable
Interlock Disable / Enable Interlock Enable Disable
Control Hierarchy Local / RemoteControl Hierarchy
(if Control = Enable)
--
(Local)
Active
group /
Common
Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz Frequency 50Hz
![Page 168: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 168/215
167
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu Name Range Contents Default
Line name Specified by user Line name --
PVT 1 – 20000VT ratio of
Phase VT100
RVT 1 – 20000VT ratio ofEarth Fault CT
100
SVCNT ALM&BLK / ALM AC input imbalanceALM&
BLK
OV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV1 Enable Off
OV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV2 Enable OffOV
OV3EN Off / On OV3 Enable Off
UV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV1 Enable DT
UV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV2 Enable Off
UV3EN Off / On UV3 Enable OffUV
VBKEN Off / On UV Block Enable Off
ZPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS1 Enable DTZPSZPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS2 Enable Off
NPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS1 Enable Off NPS
NPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS2 Enable Off
FT1 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ1 Enable B
DFT1 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ1 Enable Both
Logic1 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ1 logic L1
FT2 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ2 Enable B
DFT2 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ2 Enable Both
Logic2 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ2 logic L1
FT3 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ3 Enable B
DFT3 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ3 Enable Both
Logic3 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ3 logic L1
FT4 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ4 Enable B
DFT4 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ4 Enable Both
FRQ
Logic4 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ4 logic L1
OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V OV1 Threshold 120.0 V
TOV1 0.05 – 100.00OV1 Time multiplier
(if OV1EN = IDMT)
10.00
TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 sOV1 Definite time
(if OV1EN = DT)
0.10 s
TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s
OV1DPR 10 – 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 95%
OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V OV2 Threshold 140.0 V
TOV2 0.05 – 100.00OV2 Time multiplier
(if OV2EN = IDMT)
10.00
TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 sOV2 Definite time
(if OV2EN = DT)
0.10 s
TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s
OV2DPR 10 – 98 % OV2 DO/PU ratio 95%
OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V OV3 Threshold 160.0 V
TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s OV3 Definite time 0.10 s
OV3DPR 10 – 98 % OV3 DO/PU ratio 95%
Protection
OV
![Page 169: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 169/215
168
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu Name Range Contents Default
OV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00
OV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00
OV1-C 0.000 – 5.000
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if OV1EN = C) 0.000OV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00
OV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00
OV
OV2-C 0.000 – 5.000
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if OV2EN = C) 0.000
UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V UV1 Threshold 60.0 V
TUV1 0.05 – 100.00UV1 Time multiplier
(if UV1EN = IDMT)
10.00
TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 sUV1 Definite time
(if UV1EN = DT)
0.10 s
TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s
UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V UV2 Threshold 60.0 V
TUV2 0.05 – 100.00 UV2 Time multiplier(if UV2EN = IDMT)
10.00
TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 sUV2 Definite time
(if UV2EN = DT)
0.10 s
TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s
UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V UV3 Threshold 20.0 V
TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s UV3 Definite time 0.10 s
VBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V UV Blocking 10.0 V
UV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00
UV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00
UV1-C 0.000 – 5.000
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if UV1EN = C) 0.000
UV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00UV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00
UV
UV2-C 0.000 – 5.000
Configurable IDMTCurve setting.
(if UV2EN = C) 0.000
ZPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS1 Threshold 20.0 V
TZPS1 0.05 – 100.00ZPS1 Time multiplier
(if ZPS1EN = IDMT)
10.00
TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 sZPS1 Definite time
(if ZPS1EN = DT)
0.00 s
TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s
ZPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS2 Threshold 40.0 V
TZPS2 0.05 – 100.00ZPS2 Time multiplier
(if ZPS2EN = IDMT)
10.00
TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 sZPS2 Definite time
(if ZPS2EN = DT)
0.00 s
TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s
ZPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00
ZPS1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00
ZPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if ZPS1EN = C) 0.000
ZPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00
ZPS2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00
Protection
ZPS
ZPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if ZPS2EN = C) 0.000
![Page 170: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 170/215
![Page 171: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 171/215
170
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix H
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
![Page 172: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 172/215
171
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number
Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
Power supply
Wiring
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
Binary input circuitBinary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit check
![Page 173: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 173/215
172
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
(1) Operating value test
Element Voltage setting Measured voltage
OV1
OV2
OV3
UV1
UV2
UV3
ZPS1
ZPS2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element Multipli er setting Changed voltage Measured time
OV1 Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
OV2 Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
UV1 Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
UV2 Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
ZPS1 Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
ZPS2 Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
![Page 174: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 174/215
173
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test
(1) Operating value test
Element Voltage setting Measured voltage
NPS1
NPS2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element Multipl ier setting Changed voltage Measured time
NPS1 Voltage setting
Voltage setting
Voltage setting
NPS2 Voltage setting Voltage setting
Voltage setting
4.3 Frequency elements test
Element Frequency setting Measured frequency
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
![Page 175: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 175/215
174
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix I
Return Repair Form
![Page 176: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 176/215
175
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
RETURN / REPAIR FORM
Please complete this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION together with the
GRE130 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services
1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRE130 Model:
(Example: Type: GRE130 Model: 411A )
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1. Reason for returning the relay
mal-function
does not operate
increased error
investigation required
others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB sticl or CD rom, or fill
in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
![Page 177: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 177/215
176
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / /
/ : : .
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Van: V
V bn: V
Vcn: V
Vab: V
V bc: V
Vca: V
V ph: V
V0: V
V1: VV2: V
f: Hz
Fault values
Van: V
V bn: V
Vcn: V
Vab: V
V bc: V
Vca: V
V ph: VV0: V
V1: V
V2: V
f: Hz
![Page 178: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 178/215
177
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4. Describe the details of the incident:
5. Date incident occurred
Day/Month/Year: / / /
(Example: 10/Dec/2010)
6. Give any comments about the GRE130, including any relevant documents:
![Page 179: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 179/215
178
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
![Page 180: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 180/215
179
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix J
Technical Data
![Page 181: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 181/215
180
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC voltage Vn: 110V
Frequency: 50/60Hz
Power supply: 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 88–264Vac)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12%
Power supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V
Binary input circuit DC voltage: For alarm indication
110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
For trip circuit supervision
Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)
≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating)
≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating)
≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)
Overload Ratings
AC voltage inputs: 2 times rated voltage continuous
Burden
AC phase voltage inputs: 0.1 VA (at rated voltage)
Power supply: 10W (quiescent), 15W (maximum)Binary input circuit: 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Overvoltage Protect ion (59)
1st, 2
nd, 3
rd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type: DTL, IDMTL
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
DO/PU ratio 10 - 98% in 1% stepsReset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage Protection (27)
1
st
, 2
nd
, 3
rd
Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V stepsDelay type: DTL, IDMTL
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Zero Sequence Overvoltage (ZPS) Protection (59N)
1st, 2
nd ZPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
![Page 182: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 182/215
181
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (NPS) Protection (47)
1st, 2
nd NPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Frequency Protection (81U/O)
1st – 4
th Under frequency 45.00 – 50.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)
54.00 – 60.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)
1st – 4
th Under frequency 50.00 – 55.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)
60.00 – 66.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)
Frequency rate-of-change 0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
Timer for stage 1st - 4
th 0.00 – 100.00 s in 0.01 s steps
Frequency UV Block 40 – 100V in 1V steps
Accuracy
IDMTL Overvoltage Pick-up:
All Other Overvoltage Pick-ups:
105% of setting 5%
100% of setting 5%
Overvoltage PU/DO ratio: approx, 95% (settable for phase overvoltage)
IDMTL Undervoltage Pick-up: 95% of setting 5%
All Other Undervoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting 5%
Undervoltage PU/DO ratio:
Over Frequency Pick-ups:
Under Frequency Pick-ups:
Frequency rate-of-change Pick-ups:
approx, 105%
100% of setting 0.05Hz (setting: rated frequency - 5.00Hz)
100% of setting 0.05Hz (setting: rated frequency + 5.00Hz)
100% of setting 0.05Hz/s (setting: 5.00Hz/s)Inverse Operate Time: IEC60255-127, 5% or 30ms
(OV; 1.2 G/Gs GD/Gs , UV; 0 G/Gs 1) GD = 300V
OV Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
UV Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms (DT, input: 80% of setting)
ZPS Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
NPS Definite Operate Time; DTL + 50ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
Under/Over Frequency Operate Time
Frequency rate-of-change Operate Time
DTL + 80-200ms (rated frequency: 50Hz)
DTL + 70-170ms (rated frequency: 60Hz)
190-300ms (rated frequency: 50Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
160-250ms (rated frequency: 60Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts
Front Communication port - local PC (USB2.0)
Connector type: USB-Type B
Cable length: 5m (max.)
Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485)
Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Cable type: Twisted pair
Cable length: 1200m (max.)
![Page 183: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 183/215
182
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Connector: Screw terminals
Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min.
Transmission rate: 19.2 kbps
Rear Communication port (Ethernet)
100BASE-TX
100BASE-FX
RJ-45 connector
SC connector
Binary Inputs
Operating voltage For signal detection
Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating
Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating
Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating
Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating
For trip circuit supervision
≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating
≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating
≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating
≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating
Binary Outputs
Number 4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact)
Ratings
model 410 and 411; BO#1 and #2
model 412: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6
other BOs
Make and carry: 5A continuously
Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R40ms)
Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 8A, 250Vdc for 0.2s (L/R40ms)
Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Durability:
Pickup time:
Reset time:
Loaded contact: 1,000 operations
Unloaded contact: 10,000 operations
Less than 15ms
Less than 10ms
Mechanical design Weight 1.5kg for model 410A and 411A
1.8kg for model 412A
Width 149mm for model 410A and 411A
223mm for model 412A
Height 177mm
Depth 168mm
Case color Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5
Installation Flush mounting with attachment kits
![Page 184: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 184/215
183
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test Standards Details
Atmospher ic Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2
IEC 60068-2-30
Operating range: -20C to +60C.
Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.
Humidity IEC 60068-2-78 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-5
IEEE C37.90.0
2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of
5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit (PSU), BI and BO
circuits; between terminals and earth, and between
independent circuits
3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth
3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts
1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals
and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency
Disturbance / Damped
Oscillatory Wave
IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-12
IEEE C37.90.1
1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode.
1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Electrostatic
Discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-2
6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
Radiated RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-3
Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz
and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,
900 and 1890MHz.
Fast Transient
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A,
IEC 61000-4-4,IEEE C37.90.1
4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5,
IEC 61000-4-5
1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:
HV, PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-6
10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Power Frequency
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-7 Class A,
IEC 61000-4-16
300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25, Conducted emissions:
![Page 185: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 185/215
184
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Test Standards Details
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A,
IEC 61000-6-4
0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB
European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic
EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EECCompliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard
EN 60255-27.
![Page 186: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 186/215
185
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix K
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
![Page 187: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 187/215
186
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The symbols used in the scheme logic and their respective meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to external equipment
Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A B C Output
1 1 1 1
Other cases 0
A B C Output
1 1 0 1
Other cases 0
A B C Output
1 0 0 1
Other cases 0
OR gates
A B C Output
0 0 0 0
Other cases 1
A B C Output
0 0 1 0Other cases 1
A B C Output
0 1 1 0
Other cases 1
A
OutputB &
C
A
OutputB 1
C
A
OutputB &
C
A
OutputB 1
C
A
OutputB 1
C
A
OutputB
C
&
![Page 188: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 188/215
187
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
1 0
Timer
Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting
XXX - YYY: Setting range
Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting
XXX - YYY: Setting range
One-shot timer
XXX - YYY: Setting range
Flip-flop
S R Output
0 0 No change
1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 0
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
1 ON 1
Other cases 0
Switch Output
ON 1
OFF 0
Output A
0t
XXX
t0
XXX
0t
XXX - YYY
XXX - YYY
t0
Output
Output
ON
ON
A
S
OutputF/F
R
1
XXX - YYY
A Output A
Output
![Page 189: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 189/215
188
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix L
Modbus: Interoperability
![Page 190: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 190/215
189
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Modbus: Interoperability
1. Physical and Data Link Layer
- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface
- RTU mode only
- Coding System:
8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit)
Even parity
- Address setting range: 1-247
- Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200
2. Application Layer
(1) Modbus response format
FC Description Supplementary explanation
01 Read Coils Returns remote control enable flag
02 Read Discrete Inputs Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc.
03 Read Holding Registers -
04 Read Input Register Returns value of analog inputs
05 Write Single Coil Remote command and Time synchronization
06 Write Single Register Need to specify record number
07 Read Exception status Returns relay and CB status
08 Diagnostic -
16 Write Multiple Registers Current time setting, etc.
17 Report Slave ID Returns device ID
43 Read device Identification (SC:14) Returns device information
For FC=01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described in "MODBUS
Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".
For other FCs, the response format is as following:
07 Read Exception status
Response Data
Output Data (1byte)
bit Description
0 IN SERVICE (LED)
1 TRIP (LED)
2 ALARM (LED)
3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
4 CB CLOSED (LED)
5 CB OPEN (LED)
6 Relay fail output (BO)
7 <Reserved>
![Page 191: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 191/215
190
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
08 Diagnostic
Response Data
SC Response Data Field Description
00 Echo Request Data (2Bytes) Return Query Data
01 <not supported>02 Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes) Return Diagnostic Register
bit0 IN SERVICE (LED)
bit1 TRIP (LED)
bit2 ALARM (LED)
bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
bit4 <Reserved>
bit5 <Reserved>
bit6 <Reserved>
bit7 <Reserved>
bit8 3-phase current balance alarm
bit9 CB contact status alarm bit10 CB operation number alarm
bit11 <Reserved>
bit12 V0 error alarm
bit13 V2 error alarm
bit14 <Reserved>
bit15 <Reserved>
03- <not supported>
17 Report Slave ID
Response Data
Byte Count (1byte) 18bytesSlave ID (17bytes) Relay type and model ID
GRE120-401A-00-10 ASCII
Run Indicator Status (1byte) 0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service
43 Read Device Identification (SC:14)
Response Data
Param OID
01 Basic device identification
00 TOSHIBA Vendor Name
01 GRE130-411 Product Code
02 A Major Minor Revision02 Regular device identification
03 <Non> Vendor URL
04 GRE120 Product Name
05 411A-10-10 Model Name
06 Overvoltage Relay User Application Name
07- <Reserved> Reserved
03 Extended device identification
80 <SPACE>
81 GS1EM1-03-A Software version
04 <not supported>One specific identification
object
![Page 192: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 192/215
191
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
(2) Modbus address map group
Modbus data model Address(ID) Number Data specification
Coils 0x0200 1 Remote control (enable flag)
(Read/Write) 0x0400 4Remote control (command, interlock), Time
synchronization, Clear command
Discrete Input 0x1000 6 BI0x1016 5 Relay fail output, BO
(Read Only) 0x1040 14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status)
0x1080 16 Virtual LED
0x1201 - Signal list (see Appendix A for detail)
Input Registers 0x2000 40
Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., not
converted to engineering units)
2-word long
(Read Only) 0x2800 40
Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc.,
converted to engineering units)
2-word long
Holding Registers 0x3000 29 Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records,write protected
(Read/Write) 0x3200 72Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200
records, write protected
0x3800 4 Current time data (IEC format)
0x3810 30 Counter data (number of trips etc), 2-word long
0x3E82 2 Password for remote control
0x4000 - Setting value (see Appendix H for detail), Read Only
0x8000 Undefined after this address
Discrete Input Single bit Read-OnlyCoils Single bit Read-Write
Input Registers 16-bit word Read-Only
Holding Registers 16-bit word Read-Write
(3)Modbus address map
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Coils
Remote control (R/W)
0200 Remote control enable flag
0400 Remote control command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
0401 Remote interlock command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
0402 Remote reset command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on)
0403Time synchronization
commandCall time synchronization task (on)
![Page 193: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 193/215
192
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Discrete Input
BI status (R)
1000 BI1
1001 BI2
1002 BI3 Only for GRE130-411A
1003 BI4 Only for GRE130-411A
1004 BI5 Only for GRE130-411A
1005 BI6 Only for GRE130-411A
BO status (R)
1016 Relay fail output
1017 BO1
1018 BO2
1019 BO3
101A BO4
101B BO5 Only for GRE130-412A101C BO6 Only for GRE130-412A
101D BO7 Only for GRE130-412A
101E BO8 Only for GRE130-412A
LED lamp status (R)
1040 IN SERVICE
1041 TRIP
1042 ALARM
1043 RELAY FAIL
1044 CB CLOSED
1045 CB OPEN
1046 LOCAL1047 REMOTE
1048 LED1
1049 LED2
104A LED3
104B LED4
104C LED5
104D LED6
Virtual LED status (R)
1080 IND1 BIT1
1081 IND1 BIT2
1082 IND1 BIT31083 IND1 BIT4
1084 IND1 BIT5
1085 IND1 BIT6
1086 IND1 BIT7
1087 IND1 BIT8
1088 IND2 BIT1
1089 IND2 BIT2
108A IND2 BIT3
108B IND2 BIT4
108C IND2 BIT5
108D IND2 BIT6108E IND2 BIT7
108F IND2 BIT8
![Page 194: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 194/215
193
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Signal list (R)
1201 Signal No.1 See Appendix A
1202 Signal No.2 See Appendix A
… Signal No.n Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix A
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Input Registers
Analog data (R) Followings are NOT converted to engineering units.
2000 Van / Vab / Vph (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2001 Van / Vab / Vph (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
2002 Van / Vab (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2003 Van / Vab (L)
2004 Vbn / Vbc (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2005 Vbn / Vbc (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)2006 Vbn / Vbc (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2007 Vbn / Vbc (L)
2008 Vcn / Vca (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2009 Vcn / Vca (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
200A Vcn / Vca (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
200B Vcn / Vca (L)
200C V0 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
200D V0 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
200E V0 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
200F V0 (L)
2010 V2 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)2011 V2 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
2012 V2 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2013 V2 (L)
2014 V1 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2015 V1 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
2016 V1 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2017 V1 (L)
2018 <Reserved>
2019 <Reserved>
201A <Reserved>
201B <Reserved>201C <Reserved>
201D <Reserved>
201E <Reserved>
201F <Reserved>
2020 <Reserved>
2021 <Reserved>
2022 <Reserved>
2023 <Reserved>
2024 <Reserved>
2025 <Reserved>
![Page 195: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 195/215
194
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
2026 f (H)
2027 f (L)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
2028 fmax (H)2029 fmax (L)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
202A fmin (H)
202B fmin (L)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
202C df / dt (H)
202D df / dt (L)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
202E df / dtx (H)
202F df / dtx (L)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
2030 df / dtn (H)
2031 df / dtn (L)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
2032 <Reserved>
2033 <Reserved>
2034 <Reserved>
2035 <Reserved>
2036 <Reserved>
2037 <Reserved>
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Analog data (R)The following are converted to engineering units.
(the same as the displayed value)
2800 Van (H)2801 Van (L)
2802 Van (H)
2803 Van (L)
2804 Vbn (H)
2805 Vbn (L)
2806 Vbn (H)
2807 Vbn (L)
2808 Vcn (H)
2809 Vcn (L)
280A Vcn (H)
280B Vcn (L)
280C Vab (H)
280D Vab (L)
280E Vab (H)
280F Vab (L)
2810 Vbc (H)
2811 Vbc (L)
2812 Vbc (H)
2813 Vbc (L)
2814 Vca (H)
2815 Vca (L)2816 Vca (H)
2817 Vca (L)
![Page 196: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 196/215
195
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
2818 Vph (H)
2819 Vph (L)
281A V0 (H)
281B V0 (L)
281C V0 (H)281D V0 (L)
281E V1 (H)
281F V1 (L)
2820 V1 (H)
2821 V1 (L)
2822 V2 (H)
2823 V2 (L)
2824 V2 (H)
2825 V2 (L)
2826 f (H)
2827 f (L)
2828 fmax (H)
2829 fmax (L)
282A fmin (H)
282B fmin (L)
282C df / dt (H)
282D df / dt (L)
282E df / dtx (H)
282F df / dtx (L)
2830 df / dtn (H)
2831 df / dtn (L)2832 <Reserved>
2833 <Reserved>
2834 <Reserved>
2835 <Reserved>
2836 <Reserved>
2837 <Reserved>
![Page 197: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 197/215
196
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Holding Registers
Fault record (R)
3000 records count Number of record saved (max. 4)
3001 No.1Indication of record #1. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
3002 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3003 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3004 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3005 year 0-99(y)
3006 Fault phase
3007 Trip mode
3008 No.2Indication of record #2. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
3009 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
300A hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
300B months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
300C year 0-99(y)
300D Fault phase
300E Trip mode
300F No.3Indication of record #3. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
3010 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3011 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3012 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)3013 year 0-99(y)
3014 Fault phase
3015 Trip mode
3016 No.4Indication of record #4. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
3017 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3018 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3019 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
301A year 0-99(y)
301B Fault phase
301C Trip mode
![Page 198: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 198/215
197
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Event record (R) 10 records are obtained at a time.
3200 records count Number of records saved (max. 200)
3201 set No. (R/W) Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10records)
3202 No. XReturns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to
0.
3203 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3204 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3205 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3206 year 0-99(y)
3207 Event ID See Appendix B
3208 Action 1:on 、2:off 、
3209 No.X+1
Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
320A milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
320B hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
320C months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
320D year 0-99(y)
320E Event ID See Appendix B
320F Action 1:on 、2:off
3210 No.X+2Returns "Set No.+2". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
3211 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3212 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、
0-59(m)3213 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3214 year 0-99(y)
3215 Event ID See Appendix B
3216 Action 1:on 、2:off
3217 No.X+3Returns "Set No.+3". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
3218 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3219 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
321A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
321B year 0-99(y)
321C Event ID See Appendix B321D Action 1:on 、2:off
321E No.X+4Returns "Set No.+4". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
321F milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3220 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3221 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3222 year 0-99(y)
3223 Event ID See Appendix B
3224 Action 1:on 、2:off
![Page 199: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 199/215
198
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
3225 No.X+5Returns "Set No.+5". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
3226 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)3227 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3228 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3229 year 0-99(y)
322A Event ID See Appendix B
322B Action 1:on 、2:off
322C No.X+6Returns "Set No.+6". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
322D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
322E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
322F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3230 year 0-99(y)
3231 Event ID See Appendix B
3232 Action 1:on 、2:off
3233 No.X+7Returns "Set No.+7". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
3234 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3235 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3236 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3237 year 0-99(y)
3238 Event ID See Appendix B
3239 Action 1:on 、2:off
323A No.X+8Returns "Set No.+8". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
323B milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
323C hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
323D months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
323E year 0-99(y)
323F Event ID See Appendix B
3240 Action 1:on 、2:off
3241 No.X+9Returns "Set No.+9". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
3242 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)3243 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3244 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3245 year 0-99(y)
3246 Event ID See Appendix B
3247 Action 1:on 、2:off
![Page 200: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 200/215
199
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address Description Supplementary explanation
Current time data (R/W) Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format
3800 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3801 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3802 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3803 year 0-99(y)
Counters (R/W)
3810 Trips Phase-A (H) Can be set to an initial value.
3811 Trips Phase-A (L)
3812 Trips Phase-B (H) Can be set to an initial value.
3813 Trips Phase-B (L)
3814 Trips Phase-C (H) Can be set to an initial value.
3815 Trips Phase-C (L)
3816 Trips any phase (H) Can be set to an initial value.3817 Trips any phase (L)
Password
3E82 Control (H) Password for remote control (in ASCII code)
3E83 Control (L)
Setting values
4000 See the next table for setting values.
7FFF <Reserved>
![Page 201: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 201/215
200
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
(4) Modbus address for setting values
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
6034 BI1 comm. BI 1 command trigger setting
6035 BI2 comm. BI 2 command trigger setting
6036 BI3 comm. BI 3 command trigger setting
6037 BI4 comm. BI 4 command trigger setting
6038 BI5 comm. BI 5 command trigger setting
Event Record
6039 BI6 comm. BI 6 command trigger setting
603C Time1 Disturbance record period before fault
6000 Time2 Disturbance record period after fault
6001 OV OC element for disturbance
6002 UV EF element for disturbance
6003 ZPS SEF element for disturbance
6004 NPS NPS element for disturbance
6005 Trip Disturbance trigger
6006 BI Disturbance trigger
6007 OV Disturbance trigger
6008 UV Disturbance trigger
6009 ZPS Disturbance trigger
600A NPS Disturbance trigger
603D FRQ Disturbance trigger
600B SIG1 Disturbance trigger
600C SIG2 Disturbance trigger
600D SIG3 Disturbance trigger
600E SIG4 Disturbance trigger
600F SIG5 Disturbance trigger
6010 SIG6 Disturbance trigger
6011 SIG7 Disturbance trigger6012 SIG8 Disturbance trigger
6013 SIG9 Disturbance trigger
6014 SIG10 Disturbance trigger
6015 SIG11 Disturbance trigger
6016 SIG12 Disturbance trigger
6017 SIG13 Disturbance trigger
6018 SIG14 Disturbance trigger
6019 SIG15 Disturbance trigger
601A SIG16 Disturbance trigger
601B SIG17 Disturbance trigger
601C SIG18 Disturbance trigger
601D SIG19 Disturbance trigger601E SIG20 Disturbance trigger
601F SIG21 Disturbance trigger
6020 SIG22 Disturbance trigger
6021 SIG23 Disturbance trigger
6022 SIG24 Disturbance trigger
6023 SIG25 Disturbance trigger
6024 SIG26 Disturbance trigger
6025 SIG27 Disturbance trigger
6026 SIG28 Disturbance trigger
6027 SIG29 Disturbance trigger
6028 SIG30 Disturbance trigger
6029 SIG31 Disturbance trigger
DisturbanceRecord
602A SIG32 Disturbance trigger
![Page 202: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 202/215
201
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
602B TCSPEN Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
602C CBSMEN Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable
602D TCAEN Trip Count Alarm EnableCounter6030 TCALM Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting
6400 Display MeteringStatus
6401 Time sync. Time synchronization method
6C00 BITHR1 BI threshold for BI1 & BI2
6C01 BITHR2 BI threshold for BI3-6
6C02 BI1 BI1PUD Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay
6C03 BI1 BI1DOD Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay
6C04 BI1 BI1SNS Binary Input 1 Sense
6C05 BI1 BI1SGS Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select
6C06 BI1 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6C07 BI1 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6C08 BI1 OV3BLK OV3 Block6C09 BI1 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6C0A BI1 UV2BLK UV2 Block
6C0B BI1 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6C0C BI1 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6C0D BI1 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6C0E BI1 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6C0F BI1 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6C10 BI1 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C11 BI1 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C12 BI1 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C13 BI1 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6C14 BI1 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase6C15 BI1 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C16 BI1 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C17 BI1 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C18 BI1 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C19 BI1 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C1A BI1 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6C1B BI1 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6C1C BI1 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6C1D BI1 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C1E BI1 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C1F BI1 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C20 BI1 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C21 BI1 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6C22 BI1 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6C23 BI1 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
6C24 BI1 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6C25 BI2 BI2PUD Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay
6C26 BI2 BI2DOD Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay
6C27 BI2 BI2SNS Binary Input 2 Sense
6C28 BI2 BI2SGS Binary Input 2 Settings Group Select
6C29 BI2 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6C2A BI2 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6C2B BI2 OV3BLK OV3 Block
Binary Input
6C2C BI2 UV1BLK UV1 Block
![Page 203: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 203/215
202
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name UV3BLK
6C2D BI2 UV2BLK UV2 Block
6C2E BI2 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6C2F BI2 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6C30 BI2 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6C31 BI2 NP1BLK NPS1 Block6C32 BI2 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6C33 BI2 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C34 BI2 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C35 BI2 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C36 BI2 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6C37 BI2 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6C38 BI2 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C39 BI2 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C3A BI2 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C3B BI2 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C3C BI2 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C3D BI2 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6C3E BI2 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6C3F BI2 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6C40 BI2 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C41 BI2 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C42 BI2 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C43 BI2 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C44 BI2 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6C45 BI2 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6C46 BI2 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
6C47 BI2 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6C48 BI3 BI3PUD Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay
6C49 BI3 BI3DOD Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay
6C4A BI3 BI3SNS Binary Input 3 Sense
6C4B BI3 BI3SGS Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select
6C4C BI3 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6C4D BI3 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6C4E BI3 OV3BLK OV3 Block
6C4F BI3 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6C50 BI3 UV2BLK UV2 Block
6C51 BI3 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6C52 BI3 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6C53 BI3 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6C54 BI3 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6C55 BI3 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6C56 BI3 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C57 BI3 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C58 BI3 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C59 BI3 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6C5A BI3 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6C5B BI3 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C5C BI3 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C5D BI3 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C5E BI3 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C5F BI3 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
![Page 204: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 204/215
203
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
6C60 BI3 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6C61 BI3 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6C62 BI3 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6C63 BI3 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C64 BI3 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C65 BI3 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C66 BI3 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C67 BI3 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6C68 BI3 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6C69 BI3 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
6C6A BI3 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6C6B BI4 BI4PUD Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay
6C6C BI4 BI4DOD Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay
6C6D BI4 BI4SNS Binary Input 4 Sense
6C6E BI4 BI4SGS Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select
6C6F BI4 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6C70 BI4 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6C71 BI4 OV3BLK OV3 Block
6C72 BI4 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6C73 BI4 UV2BLK UV2 Block
6C74 BI4 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6C75 BI4 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6C76 BI4 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6C77 BI4 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6C78 BI4 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6C79 BI4 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm6C7A BI4 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C7B BI4 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C7C BI4 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6C7D BI4 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6C7E BI4 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C7F BI4 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C80 BI4 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C81 BI4 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C82 BI4 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C83 BI4 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6C84 BI4 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6C85 BI4 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.6C86 BI4 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C87 BI4 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C88 BI4 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C89 BI4 CNTLCK Interlock Input
Binary Input
6C8A BI4 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6C8B BI4 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6C8C BI4 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
6C8D BI4 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6C8E BI5 BI5PUD Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay
6C8F BI5 BI5DOD Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay
![Page 205: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 205/215
204
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
6C90 BI5 BI5SNS Binary Input 5 Sense
6C91 BI5 BI5SGS Binary Input 5 Settings Group Select
6C92 BI5 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6C93 BI5 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6C94 BI5 OV3BLK OV3 Block
6C95 BI5 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6C96 BI5 UV2BLK UV2 Block
6C97 BI5 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6C98 BI5 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6C99 BI5 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6C9A BI5 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6C9B BI5 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6C9C BI5 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C9D BI5 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C9E BI5 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C9F BI5 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6CA0 BI5 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6CA1 BI5 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6CA2 BI5 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6CA3 BI5 RMTRST Remote Reset
6CA4 BI5 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6CA5 BI5 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6CA6 BI5 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6CA7 BI5 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6CA8 BI5 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6CA9 BI5 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6CAA BI5 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6CAB BI5 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6CAC BI5 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6CAD BI5 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6CAE BI5 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6CAF BI5 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
6CB0 BI5 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6CB1 BI6 BI6PUD Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay
6CB2 BI6 BI6DOD Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay
6CB3 BI6 BI6SNS Binary Input 6 Sense
6CB4 BI6 BI6SGS Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select
6CB5 BI6 OV1BLK OV1 Block6CB6 BI6 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6CB7 BI6 OV3BLK OV3 Block
6CB8 BI6 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6CB9 BI6 UV2BLK UV2 Block
Binary Input
6CBA BI6 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6CBB BI6 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6CBC BI6 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6CBD BI6 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6CBE BI6 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6CBF BI6 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
![Page 206: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 206/215
205
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
6CC0 BI6 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6CC1 BI6 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6CC2 BI6 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase6CC3 BI6 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6CC4 BI6 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6CC5 BI6 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6CC6 BI6 RMTRST Remote Reset
6CC7 BI6 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6CC8 BI6 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6CC9 BI6 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6CCA BI6 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6CCB BI6 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6CCC BI6 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6CCD BI6 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6CCE BI6 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6CCF BI6 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6CD0 BI6 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6CD1 BI6 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6CD2 BI6 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
Binary Input
6CD3 BI6 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
![Page 207: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 207/215
206
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
7428 BO1 Logic Logic Gate Type
7429 BO1 Reset Reset operation
7400 BO1 In #1 Functions
7401 BO1 In #2 Functions
7402 BO1 In #3 Functions
7403 BO1 In #4 Functions
7450 BO1 TBO Delay/Pulse Width
742A BO2 Logic Logic Gate Type
742B BO2 Reset Reset operation
7404 BO2 In #1 Functions
7405 BO2 In #2 Functions
7406 BO2 In #3 Functions
7407 BO2 In #4 Functions
7451 BO2 TBO Delay/Pulse Width
742C BO3 Logic Logic Gate Type
742D BO3 Reset Reset operation
7408 BO3 In #1 Functions
7409 BO3 In #2 Functions
740A BO3 In #3 Functions
740B BO3 In #4 Functions
7452 BO3 TBO Delay/Pulse Width
742E BO4 Logic Logic Gate Type
742F BO4 Reset Reset operation
740C BO4 In #1 Functions
740D BO4 In #2 Functions
740EBO4 In #3 Functions
740F BO4 In #4 Functions
Binary Output
7453 BO4 TBO Delay/Pulse Width
![Page 208: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 208/215
207
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
7020 LED1 Logic LED1 Logic Gate Type
7021 LED1 Reset LED1 Reset operation
7022 LED2 Logic LED2 Logic Gate Type7023 LED2 Reset LED2 Reset operation
7024 LED3 Logic LED3 Logic Gate Type
7025 LED3 Reset LED3 Reset operation
7026 LED4 Logic LED4 Logic Gate Type
7027 LED4 Reset LED4 Reset operation
7028 LED5 Logic LED5 Logic Gate Type
7029 LED5 Reset LED5 Reset operation
702A LED6 Logic LED6 Logic Gate Type
702B LED7 Reset LED6 Reset operation
7000 LED1 In #1 LED Functions
7001 LED1 In #2 LED Functions
7002 LED1 In #3 LED Functions7003 LED1 In #4 LED Functions
7004 LED2 In #1 LED Functions
7005 LED2 In #2 LED Functions
7006 LED2 In #3 LED Functions
7007 LED2 In #4 LED Functions
7008 LED3 In #1 LED Functions
7009 LED3 In #2 LED Functions
700A LED3 In #3 LED Functions
700B LED3 In #4 LED Functions
700C LED4 In #1 LED Functions
700D LED4 In #2 LED Functions
700E LED4 In #3 LED Functions700F LED4 In #4 LED Functions
7010 LED5 In #1 LED Functions
7011 LED5 In #2 LED Functions
7012 LED5 In #3 LED Functions
7013 LED5 In #4 LED Functions
7014 LED6 In #1 LED Functions
7015 LED6 In #2 LED Functions
7016 LED6 In #3 LED Functions
7017 LED6 In #4 LED Functions
7060 LED1 Color LED Color
7061 LED2 Color LED Color
7062 LED3 Color LED Color7063 LED4 Color LED Color
7064 LED5 Color LED Color
7065 LED6 Color LED Color
7066 CB CLOSED Color LED Color
7050 IND1 Reset IND1 Reset operation
7051 IND2 Reset IND1 Reset operation
7030 IND1 BIT1 Virtual LED
7031 IND1 BIT2 Virtual LED
7032 IND1 BIT3 Virtual LED
7033 IND1 BIT4 Virtual LED
7034 IND1 BIT5 Virtual LED
7035 IND1 BIT6 Virtual LED7036 IND1 BIT7 Virtual LED
Configurable LED
7037 IND1 BIT8 Virtual LED
![Page 209: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 209/215
208
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
7038 IND2 BIT1 Virtual LED
7039 IND2 BIT2 Virtual LED
703A IND2 BIT3 Virtual LED
703B IND2 BIT4 Virtual LED
703C IND2 BIT5 Virtual LED703D IND2 BIT6 Virtual LED
703E IND2 BIT7 Virtual LED
Configurable LED
703F IND2 BIT8 Virtual LED
6800 Active gp. Active setting group
6803 AOLED ALARM LED light control for alarm output
6804 Control Control enable
6805 Interlock Interlock enable
6806 Control Kind Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)
Active group/
Common
6807 Frequency Frequency
![Page 210: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 210/215
209
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
4C00 PVT VT ratio
4C01 RVT Residual VT ratio
4017 SVCNT AC input imbalance
4000 OV OV1EN OV1 Enable
4001 OV OV2EN OV2 Enable
4002 OV OV3EN OV3 Enable
4003 UV UV1EN UV1 Enable
4004 UV UV2EN UV2 Enable
4005 UV UV3EN UV3 Enable
4006 UV VBLK UVBLOCK Enable
4007 ZPS ZPS1EN ZPS1 Enable
4008 ZPS ZPS2EN ZPS2 Enable
4009 NPS NPS1EN NPS1 Enable
400A NPS NPS2EN NPS2 Enable
400B FRQ1 FT1 FRQ1 Enable / Type
400C FRQ1 DFT1 DFRQ1 Enable / Type
400D FRQ1 Logic1 FRQ1 Logic
400E FRQ2 FT2 FRQ2 Enable / Type
400F FRQ2 DFT2 DFRQ2 Enable / Type
4010 FRQ2 Logic2 FRQ2 Logic
4011 FRQ3 FT3 FRQ3 Enable / Type
4012 FRQ3 DFT3 DFRQ3 Enable / Type
4013 FRQ3 Logic3 FRQ3 Logic
4014 FRQ4 FT4 FRQ4 Enable / Type
4015 FRQ4 DFT4 DFRQ4 Enable / Type
4016 FRQ4 Logic4 FRQ4 Logic
4800 OV OV1 OV1 Threshold setting4803 OV TOV1 OV1 Time multiplier setting
4400 OV TOV1 OV1 Definite time setting
4804 OV TOV1R OV1 Definite time reset delay
4805 OV OV1DPR OV1 DO/PU ratio
4801 OV OV2 OV2 Threshold setting
4816 OV TOV2 OV2 Time multiplier setting
4401 OV TOV2 OV2 Definite time setting
4817 OV TOV2R OV2 Definite time reset delay
4806 OV OV2DPR OV2 DO/PU ratio
4802 OV OV3 OV3 Threshold setting
4402 OV TOV3 OV3 Definite time setting
4807 OV OV3DPR OV3 DO/PU ratio4818 OV OV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
4819 OV OV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
481A OV OV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
481B OV OV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
481C OV OV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
481D OV OV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
Protection
![Page 211: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 211/215
210
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
4808 UV UV1 UV1 Threshold setting
480B UV TUV1 UV1 Time multiplier setting
4403 UV TUV1 UV1 Definite time setting
480C UV TUV1R UV1 Definite time reset delay
4809 UV UV2 UV2 Threshold setting
481E UV TUV2 UV2 Time multiplier setting
4404 UV TUV2 UV2 Definite time setting
481F UV TUV2R UV2 Definite time reset delay
480A UV UV3 UV2 Threshold setting
4405 UV TUV3 UV3 Definite time setting
480D UV VBLK UV Block Threshold setting
4820 UV UV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
4821 UV UV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
4822 UV UV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
4823 UV UV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
4824 UV UV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
4825 UV UV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
480E ZPS ZPS1 ZPS1 Threshold setting
4810 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Time multiplier setting
4406 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Definite time setting
4811 ZPS TZPS1R ZPS1 Definite time reset delay
480F ZPS ZPS2 ZPS2 Threshold setting
4826 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Time multiplier setting
4407 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Definite time setting
4827 ZPS TZPS2R ZPS2 Definite time reset delay
4828 ZPS ZPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
4829 ZPS ZPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1482A ZPS ZPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
482B ZPS ZPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
482C ZPS ZPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
482D ZPS ZPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
4812 NPS NPS1 NPS1 Threshold setting
4814 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Time multiplier setting
4408 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Definite time setting
4815 NPS TNPS1R NPS1 Definite time reset delay
4813 NPS NPS2 NPS2 Threshold setting
482E NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Time multiplier setting
4409 NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Definite time setting
482F NPS TNPS2R NPS2 Definite time reset delay4830 NPS NPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
4831 NPS NPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
4832 NPS NPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
4833 NPS NPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
4834 NPS NPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
4835 NPS NPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
Protection
![Page 212: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 212/215
211
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group(Menu)
Address Name Contents
4836 FRQ F11 F11 Threshold setting
440A FRQ TF11 F11 Time delay setting
4837 FRQ F12 F12 Threshold setting440B FRQ TF12 F12 Time delay setting
4838 FRQ DF1 DFRQ1 Threshold setting
4839 FRQ F21 F21 Threshold setting
440C FRQ TF21 F21 Time delay setting
483A FRQ F22 F22 Threshold setting
440D FRQ TF22 F22 Time delay setting
483B FRQ DF2 DFRQ2 Threshold setting
483C FRQ F31 F31 Threshold setting
440E FRQ TF31 F31 Time delay setting
483D FRQ F32 F32 Threshold setting
440F FRQ TF32 F32 Time delay setting
483E FRQ DF3 DFRQ3 Threshold setting483F FRQ F41 F41 Threshold setting
4410 FRQ TF41 F41 Time delay setting
4840 FRQ F42 F42 Threshold setting
4411 FRQ TF42 F42 Time delay setting
4841 FRQ DF4 DFRQ4 Threshold setting
Protection
4842 FRQ FVBLK FRQ Block threshold setting
![Page 213: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 213/215
212
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix M
Ordering
![Page 214: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 214/215
213
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Ordering
Under/Overvoltage Relay A
GRE130 0
Type:
Voltage Relay GRE130
Model:
- Model 410: Four pole
2 x BIs, 4 x Bos, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
410
411
412
Rating:
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc
1
2
A
Standard and language:
IEC (English)
ANSI (English)
Chinese
0
1
2
Communication:
RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
Following options can be equipped
with Model 402 and 422 only
RS485 2ports (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
RS485 2ports (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
10
11
20
21
A0
A1
B0
B1
C0
C1
D0
D1
![Page 215: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf](https://reader034.fdocuments.in/reader034/viewer/2022052516/577cc5fc1a28aba7119d751b/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 215/215
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6